Service Manual: Easycoder® Pf2I, Pf4I, and Pf4I Compact Industrial Printers

Service Manual
EasyCoder PF2i,
PF4i, and PF4i
Compact Industrial
printers
Intermec Technologies Corporation

Worldwide Headquarters
6001 36th Ave.W.
Everett, WA 98203
U.S.A.
www.intermec.com
The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate
and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any
other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation.
Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior
notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation.
2003-2007 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved.
The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar,
dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, INCA (under license), i-gistics,
Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower,
Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares,
and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies
Corporation.
There are U.S. and foreign patents pending.
The name Centronics is wholly owned by GENICOM Corporation.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Torx is a registered trademark of Camcar Division of Textron Inc.
TrueDoc is a registered trademark of Bitstream, Inc.
TrueType is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Unicode is a trademark of Unicode Inc.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Document Change Record
This page records changes to this document. Please note that the document
was originally released as 1-960579-00, and underwent two revisions
before the old part number was abandoned.
Version
Number
Date
Description of Change
001
8/2007
Revised to support IM4 RFID kit. Added sections about

servicing and troubleshooting RFID parts.
EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial Printers Service Manual
iii
iv
Contents
Before You Begin................................................................................................................... xi
Safety Summary.................................................................................................. xi
Sicherheitsbersicht............................................................................................ xi
Safety Information............................................................................................. xii
Global Services and Support.............................................................................. xii
Who Should Read This Document?.................................................................. xiii
Related Documents...........................................................................................xiv
Models and Options
Front and Keyboard
Covers and Doors
1.1 Identification 2
EasyCoder PF2i................................................................................................... 2
EasyCoder PF4i................................................................................................... 3
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial.................................................................... 4
All Models........................................................................................................... 5
Options for EasyCoder PF2i................................................................................ 6
Options for EasyCoder PF4i................................................................................ 7
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial.................................................................... 8
Interfaces............................................................................................................. 9
Checking Hardware and Firmware.................................................................... 10
1.2 EasyCoder PF2i Specifications.......................................................................................11
1.3 EasyCoder PF4i Specifications ......................................................................................13
1.4 EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Specifications........................................................15
1.5 EasyCoder PF2i Dimensions..........................................................................................17
Long Side Door................................................................................................. 17
Short Side Door................................................................................................. 19
1.6 EasyCoder PF4i Dimensions..........................................................................................21
Long Side Door................................................................................................. 21
Short Side Door................................................................................................. 23
Megatop............................................................................................................ 25
Paper Cutter...................................................................................................... 27
All PF4i (except Megatop and Cutter).............................................................. 28
1.7 EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Dimensions..........................................................29
Long Side Door................................................................................................. 29
Megatop............................................................................................................ 31
Paper Cutter...................................................................................................... 33
All PF4i Compact Industrial (except Megatop and Cutter)................................ 34
2.1 Front............... 36
2.2 Print Button...................................................................................................................36
2.3 Keyboard.......................................................................................................................37
Keyboard Overlay.............................................................................................. 37
Keyboard........................................................................................................... 37
2.4 Console pcb...................................................................................................................38
3.1 Right-Hand Doors 42

EasyCoder PF2i................................................................................................. 42
EasyCoder PF4i................................................................................................. 42
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial.................................................................. 42
EasyCoder PF2i................................................................................................. 43
EasyCoder PF4i................................................................................................. 44
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial.................................................................. 46

3.2 Front and Left-Hand Cover...........................................................................................47
All Models......................................................................................................... 47
3.3 Front Door....................................................................................................................48
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial only.......................................................... 48
4 Chassis
4.1 Description....................................................................................................................50
4.2 Center Section...............................................................................................................51
4.3 Bottom Plate..................................................................................................................51
4.4 Hinges...........................................................................................................................52
Media Supply
5.1 Internal Supply 54
Media Supply Roll Post .................................................................................... 54
Media Supply Hub ........................................................................................... 55
Media Supply Positions .................................................................................... 56
5.2 Media Guides.................................................................................................................57
Standard Edge Guide......................................................................................... 57
Quick-Load Guides........................................................................................... 58
5.3 External Supply..............................................................................................................60
6 Transfer Ribbon Mechanism
6.1 Description.......... 62
6.2 Ribbon Supply Unit.......................................................................................................63
Description........................................................................................................ 63
6.3 Ribbon Rewind Unit......................................................................................................65
Description........................................................................................................ 65
6.4 Ribbon Sensor................................................................................................................66
Description........................................................................................................ 66
Adjustment (Fingerprint)................................................................................... 67
Adjustment (IPL).............................................................................................. 67
6.5 Ribbon Motor................................................................................................................68
Description........................................................................................................ 68
6.6 Front Ribbon Break Shaft..............................................................................................69
Description........................................................................................................ 69
6.7 Rear Ribbon Break Shaft................................................................................................70
Description........................................................................................................ 70
6.8 Printhead Ribbon Break Shaft........................................................................................71
Description........................................................................................................ 71
7 Print Mechanism
7.1 Description............ 74
7.2 Platen Roller .................................................................................................................78
Description ...................................................................................................... 78
7.3 Stepper Motor................................................................................................................80
Description........................................................................................................ 80
7.4 Belts...............................................................................................................................82
Description........................................................................................................ 82
Replacement...................................................................................................... 82
vi
Adjustment........................................................................................................ 82
7.5 Label Stop Sensor...........................................................................................................83
Description........................................................................................................ 83
Working Principles............................................................................................ 83
Adjustment of the Sensitivity............................................................................. 85
Adjustment of the LSS Lateral Position.............................................................. 86
Cleaning the Media Guide................................................................................. 87
Removing the Upper Media Guide.................................................................... 88
Replacing the Sensors........................................................................................ 89
7.6 Printhead.......................................................................................................................91
Description........................................................................................................ 91
Replacing the Printhead..................................................................................... 95
Precautions........................................................................................................ 96
7.7 Headlift Sensor..............................................................................................................97
Description........................................................................................................ 97
Sensor Replacement........................................................................................... 98
7.8 Headlift Mechanism.......................................................................................................99
Description........................................................................................................ 99
Printhead Pressure Adjustment........................................................................ 101
Printhead Pressure Alignment Adjust............................................................... 102
7.9 Media Feed Principles..................................................................................................103
8 Liner Takeup Unit
8.1 Description............ 108

8.2 Takeup Unit Parts........................................................................................................110
8.3 Fitting a Liner Takeup Unit..........................................................................................111
8.4 Replacing the Timing Belt............................................................................................111
9 Label Taken Sensor
9.1 Description............ 114

9.2 Replacement................................................................................................................115
9.3 Activating the LTS.......................................................................................................115
9.4 Adjustment..................................................................................................................116
10
Paper Cutter
10.1 Description 118
10.2 Installation.................................................................................................................119
10.3 Controlling the Cutter...............................................................................................121
10.4 Media Load................................................................................................................121
10.5 Servicing the Cutter...................................................................................................122
10.6 Cutter PCB................................................................................................................124
11 Electronics Compartment
11.1 Introduction 128

11.2 Accessing the Electronics Compartment.....................................................................128
11.3 Main Parts.................................................................................................................129
vii
12
Power Supply
Power Factor Control...................................................................................... 133
Forward Converter.......................................................................................... 133
Connections.................................................................................................... 133
Overheating Protection.................................................................................... 133
12.2 Replacing the Power Supply Unit............................................................................134
Replacement Procedure................................................................................... 135
12.3 Components..............................................................................................................136
12.4 Schematics.................................................................................................................138
13 CPU Board

13.2 Circuits......................................................................................................................143
Processor (U13)............................................................................................... 143
Support Chip (U30)........................................................................................ 143
Flash Memory (J20 and J21)........................................................................... 144
SDRAM Memory (J10)................................................................................... 146
Electronic Key Circuit with Real-time Clock (J30).......................................... 146
Memory Card Adapter (J22)........................................................................... 147
13.3 Connections...............................................................................................................148
13.4 Test Points..................................................................................................................149
13.5 Startup.......................................................................................................................150
13.6 Components..............................................................................................................151
13.7 Schematics.................................................................................................................153
13.8 Replacing the CPU board..........................................................................................162
14 Interfaces
14.1 Introduction 164

14.2 RS-232 Serial Communication Port ("uart1:")...........................................................165
14.3 USB Interface ("usb1:").............................................................................................166
14.4 Bar Code Wand Interface...........................................................................................167
14.5 Installing an Optional Interface Board.......................................................................168
14.6 Serial/Industrial Interface Board (not IPL).................................................................171
Description...................................................................................................... 171
Serial Port Configuration................................................................................. 172
Industrial Interface Configuration................................................................... 175
Components.................................................................................................... 178
Schematics; Serial Port..................................................................................... 179
Schematics; Industrial Interface....................................................................... 180
14.7 Double Serial Interface Board (not IPL).....................................................................181
Description...................................................................................................... 181
"uart2:" Configuration.................................................................................... 182
"uart3:" Configuration.................................................................................... 185
Components.................................................................................................... 188
Schematics "uart2:"........................................................................................ 189
Schematics "uart3:"......................................................................................... 190
14.8 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Board............................................................................191
Description...................................................................................................... 191
Connector Configuration................................................................................ 192
Components................................................................................................... 193
Schematics....................................................................................................... 194
14.9 EasyLAN Ethernet Interface Board............................................................................195
Description...................................................................................................... 195
Printer Firmware.............................................................................................. 195
viii
Installation Kit................................................................................................ 195

Installation Instructions................................................................................... 196
Components.................................................................................................... 198
Schematics....................................................................................................... 199
14.10 EasyLAN Wireless Interface Board...........................................................................200
Description...................................................................................................... 200
Printer Firmware.............................................................................................. 200
Installation Kit................................................................................................ 200
Installation Instructions................................................................................... 201
Components.................................................................................................... 204
Schematics....................................................................................................... 205
15 RFID
15.1 Replacing Components in Intermec RFID Kits.........................................................208

Replacing the antenna..................................................................................... 208
Replacing the Single or Dual Slot I/O Bus Cable (Flat Cable)...................... 209
Replacing the Radio Module........................................................................... 209
Upgrading the Radio Modules Firmware......................................................... 209
Replacing the RFID Serial Interface Board...................................................... 211
15.2 Verifying RFID functionality.....................................................................................211
Recommendations for Printers Running Fingerprint....................................... 211
Recommendations for Printers Running IPL................................................... 211
16
Troubleshooting
16.1 Diagnosing.. 214
16.2 No Reaction at Power Up...........................................................................................216
16.3 Printer Stops Working after Startup...........................................................................217
16.4 CPU Board Failures...................................................................................................218
16.5 Power Supply Unit Failures........................................................................................219
16.6 Console Errors...........................................................................................................220
16.7 Error Messages...........................................................................................................222
16.8 No Communication (general)....................................................................................224
16.9 No Serial Communication ........................................................................................225
16.10 Network Communication Problems.........................................................................227
16.11 Sensor Malfunctions................................................................................................231
Label Stop Sensor (LSS)................................................................................... 231
Headlift Sensor................................................................................................ 232
Label Taken Sensor (LTS)................................................................................ 232
Ribbon Sensor................................................................................................. 233
16.12 Printing Problems....................................................................................................234
16.13 Transfer Ribbon Problems .......................................................................................238
16.14 Liner Takeup Problems.............................................................................................240
16.15 Memory Card Problems...........................................................................................241
16.16 Paper Cutter Problems.............................................................................................242
16.17 RFID Problems........................................................................................................244
Program Overwiews
Upgrading Firmware
Intermec Shell v8.0 Overview............................................................................................250

Setup Mode Overviews......................................................................................................251
Introduction............. 266
General Principles..............................................................................................................266
ix
Upgrading From a Memory Card . ....................................................................................267

How to make an upgrading card...................................................................... 267
Upgrading From the Host..................................................................................................269
Software Suggestions........................................................................................ 269
Cable Suggestions............................................................................................ 269
How to use Intermec PrintSet and serial cable................................................. 269
How to use MS HyperTerminal and a serial cable........................................... 270
How to use command prompt FTP and Ethernet............................................ 271
How to use Intermec NetPrintSet and serial cable (Fingerprint only)............... 271
Before You Begin

This section provides you with safety information, technical support
information, and sources for additional product information.
Safety Summary
Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and
cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec
equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be
damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions.
Do Not Repair or Adjust Alone
Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any

circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be
present for your safety.
First Aid
Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.

Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.
Resuscitation
Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing.

Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you
should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.
Energized Equipment
Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible

authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock
from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform authorized
emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply strictly
with approved safety regulations.
Sicherheitsbersicht
Ihre Sicherheit ist uerst wichtig. Lesen und befolgen Sie alle Warnund Vorsichtshinweise in diesem Dokument, bevor Sie IntermecGerte verwenden und betreiben. Falls die Sicherheitswarnungen
und Vorsichtshinweise nicht befolgt werden, kann es zu ernsthaften
Verletzungen sowie Gerteschden und Datenverlusten kommen.
Nicht alleine Reparaturen oder Einstellungen durchfhren
Reparieren oder justieren Sie niemals alleine stromfhrende Gerte. Aus

Sicherheitsgrnden muss eine zweite Person anwesend sein, die erste Hilfe
leisten kann.
Erste Hilfe
Nach einer Verletzung unverzglich erste Hilfe oder medizinische

Betreuung aufsuchen. Verletzungen drfen nicht vernachlssigt werden,
auch wenn sie noch so unbedeutend erscheinen.
Wiederbelebung
Wiederbelebungsversuche mssen unverzglich eingeleitet werden, falls

jemand verletzt wird und die Atmung aussetzt. Verzgerungen knnen zum
Tod fhren. Bei Arbeiten an oder in der Nhe von Hochspannung mssen
Ihnen die zugelassenen Erste-Hilfe-Methoden vertraut sein.
xi
Stromfhrende Gerte
Niemals an stromfhrenden Gerten arbeiten, es sei denn Sie wurden von

einer verantwortlichen Stelle dazu berechtigt. Stromfhrende Gerte sind
gefhrlich. Stromschlge durch stromfhrende Gerte knnen zu tdlichen
Verletzungen fhren. Falls zugelassene Notreparaturen an stromfhrenden
Gerten vorgenommen werden mssen, ist darauf zu achten, dass die
genehmigten Sicherheitsvorschriften strikt eingehalten werden.
Safety Information
Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and
cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec
equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be
damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions.
This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings,
cautions, and notes that are in this document. You may also see icons that
tell you when to follow ESD procedures.
A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition,
or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious
injury to the persons working on the equipment.
Warnung: Ein Warnhinweis macht Sie auf ein Betriebsverfahren,
eine Praktik, einen Zustand oder eine Anweisung aufmerksam,
die genauestens befolgt werden muss, um schwere oder tdliche
Verletzungen der an den Maschinen arbeitenden Personen zu
vermeiden.
A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or
statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage
or destruction, or corruption or loss of data.
Vorsicht: Ein Vorsichtshinweis macht Sie auf ein Betriebsverfahren,
eine Praktik, einen Zustand oder eine Anweisung aufmerksam, die
genauestens befolgt werden muss, um Schden oder eine Zerstrung
der Maschine bzw. die Zerstrung oder den Verlust von Daten zu
vermeiden.
This icon appears at the beginning of any procedure in this manual
that could cause you to touch components (such as printed circuit
boards) that are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge
(ESD). When you see this icon, you must follow standard ESD
guidelines to avoid damaging the equipment you are servicing.
Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain
special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of
circumstances.
Global Services and Support

Warranty Information
To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec
web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support > Warranty.
Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document
is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent
xii
complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All
warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
Web Support
Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current

manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals,
contact your local Intermec representative or distributor.
Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at
intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request
technical support for your Intermec product.
Telephone Support
These services are available from Intermec:

In the USA and Canada
call 1-800-755-5505 and
choose this option
Services
Description
Order Intermec
products
Place an order.
Ask about an existing order.
1 and then choose 2.
Order Intermec Media
Order printer labels and

ribbons.
1 and then choose 1
Order spare parts
Order spare parts.
1 or 2 and then choose 4
Technical Support
Talk to technical support about

your Intermec Product.
2 and then choose 2
Service
Get a return authorization

number for authorized
service center repair.
Request an on-site repair
technician.
2 and then choose 1
Service contracts
Ask about an existing

contract.
Renew a contract.
Inquire about repair billing
or other service invoicing
questions.
1 or 2 and then choose 3
Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec

representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec
web site, click Contact.
Who Should Read This Document?

This Service Manual is for the person who is responsible for installing,
maintaining and troubleshooting the EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i
Compact Industrial.
Please note that the operations described in this manual should only be
carried out by skilled and authorized personnel. The printers contain wires
and circuits with up to 380V, which implies the risk of fatal electrical
shock. Moving parts may also cause harm, if incorrectly manipulated.
It is assumed that the reader possesses reasonable skills in mechanics and
electronics and is familiar with the Intermec programming languages
(Fingerprint and IPL) and their related standard application programs.
Note that even if the printers are technically identical (with the exception
xiii
of the keyboard overlay), Fingerprint and IPL make the printer work quite
differently and certain devices and options are not supported by IPL.
It is also assumed that the reader has access to the standard tools of an
electronics workshop.
Related Documents
This table contains a list of related Intermec documents and their part
numbers.
Document Title
Part Number
EasyCoder PF2i Users Guide (Fingerprint version)
1-960578-xx
EasyCoder PF4i Users Guide (Fingerprint version)
1-960580-xx
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Users Guide

(Fingerprint version)
1-960580-xx
EasyCoder PF2i Users Guide (IPL version)
1-960585-xx
EasyCoder PF4i Users Guide (IPL version)
1-960586-xx
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Users Guide (IPL

version)
1-960587-xx
EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial

Spare Parts Catalog
1-960606-xx
Fingerprint Programmers Reference Manual
937-005-xxx
IPL Programmers Reference Manual
937-007-xxx
In addition to the documents mentioned above, you may also find use for
Installation Instructions for optional equipment such as RFID kits.
The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents (as
PDF files) that you can download for free.
To download documents
1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com.
2 Click Support > Manuals.
3 In the Select a Product field, choose the product whose documentation
you want to download.
To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local
Intermec representative or distributor.
xiv
xv
xvi
Models and Options
This chapter describes how to identify the various models in the EasyCoder
PF2i/PF4i-series of printers, and provides comprehensive technical
specifications.
Chapter 1Models and Options
1.1 Identification
EasyCoder PF2i
The EasyCoder PF2i comes either as a dedicated direct thermal printer or,
optionally, as a combined direct thermal/thermal transfer printer. It can use
media up to 60 mm (2.36 inches) wide and has a print width of 56 mm
(2.2 inches). It has an 8 dots/mm (203.2 dpi) printhead.
The printer runs either Intermec Fingerprint Programming Language (FP)
v8.70 (or later) or Intermec Programming Language (IPL) v2.70 or later.
Externally, the difference is visible on the keyboard overlay. Fingerprint
printers have 22 keys and IPL printers have 7 keys.
Keyboard shows printer model
Narrow front on side door
EasyCoder PF2i (Fingerprint version)
Narrow front on side door
EasyCoder PF2i (IPL version)
EasyCoder PF4i
The EasyCoder PF4i comes either as a dedicated direct thermal printer
or a combined direct thermal/thermal transfer printer. It has an 8 dots/
mm (203.2 dpi) or an 11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi) printhead (IPL only 8
dots/mm). It can use media up to 114.3 mm (4.5 inches) wide and has a
maximum print width of 104 mm (4.095 inches) at 8 dots/mm or 105.7
mm (4.161 inches) at 11.81 dots/mm.
Wide front on side door
EasyCoder PF4i (Fingerprint version)
Wide front on side door
EasyCoder PF4i (IPL version)
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial

The EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial is a special model of EasyCoder
PF4i that has been designed for demanding industrial applications. It
differs from EasyCoder PF4i in having a dark-painted casing, stronger
hinges, a front door, a full metal media supply roll post, and a modified
print mechanism. The EasyCoder PF4i comes either as a dedicated direct
thermal printer or a combined direct thermal/thermal transfer printer. It
has an 8 dots/mm (203.2 dpi) or an 11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi) printhead
(IPL only 8 dots/mm). It can use media up to 114.3 mm (4.5 inches) wide
and has a maximum print width of 104 mm (4.095 inches) at 8 dots/mm
or 105.7 mm (4.161 inches) at 11.81 dots/mm.
Front door
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial (Fingerprint version)
Front door
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial (IPL version)
All Models
The printer can use any 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 60Hz voltage. There is no
voltage switch-over.
The machine label on the printers rear plate contains type, part number,
serial number, and signs of approval.
Machine label
Options for EasyCoder PF2i

The EasyCoder PF2i can be fitted with a number of options:
Transfer Ribbon Mechanism
(see Chapter 6)
Label Taken Sensor
(see Chapter 9)
Liner Takeup Unit
(see Chapter 8)
Media Supply Hub (replaces Supply Post)
(see Chapter 5)
3-inch Adapter (for Media Supply Hub)
(see Chapter 5)
Quick-Load Guides
(see Chapter 5)
Long or Short Side Door
(see Chapter 3)
Real Time Clock Circuit
(see Chapter 13)
Interface boards of various types
(see Chapter 14)
RFID Interface boards
(see Chapter 15)
Media supply
roll post with
edge guide
3
2
1
4
Media supply
hub
3-inch adapter
bw
fw
Label taken
sensor
Liner takeup
with guide
shaft
Short side door
Long side door
Transfer ribbon
mechanism
Quick-Load guides
Options for EasyCoder PF4i

The EasyCoder PF4i can be fitted with a number of options:
Label Taken Sensor
(see Chapter 9)
Liner Takeup Unit
(see Chapter 8)
Paper Cutter
(see Chapter 10)
Media Supply Hub (replaces Supply Post)
(see Chapter 5)
Printhead Spring (for vertical mounting)
(see Chapter 7)
3-inch Adapter (for media supply hub)
(see Chapter 5)
Quick-Load Guides (wide/narrow)
(see Chapter 5)
Long/Short Side Door or Megatop
(see Chapter 3)
Real-time Clock Circuit
(see Chapter 13)
(see Chapter 14)
Printhead spring
Media supply hub
Media supply
roll post with
edge guide
3-inch
adapter
Paper
cutter
Label taken sensor
Tray
Short side
door
Liner takeup
with guide
shaft
Long side
door
Transfer ribbon
mMechanism
8-inch Megatop
Quick-Load guides
(wide & narrow)
Optional printheads

The EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial can be fitted with a number of
options:
Label Taken Sensor
(see Chapter 9)
Liner Takeup Unit
(see Chapter 8)
Paper Cutter
(see Chapter 10)
Media Supply Hub
(see Chapter 5)
3-inch Adapter (for media supply hub)
(see Chapter 5)
Quick-Load Guides (wide/narrow)
(see Chapter 5)
Long Door or Megatop
(see Chapter 3)
Real-time Clock Circuit
(see Chapter 13)
(see Chapter 14)
Media supply hub
Label taken
sensor
Media supply
roll post
Paper
cutter
3-inch adapter
Tray
Front door
Long side door
8-inch Megatop
Liner takeup
with guide shaft
Optional printheads
Quick-Load guides
(narrow and wide)
Interfaces
The printers are as standard provided with one serial RS-232 port, one
serial USB port, and one wand interface. The wand interface is not
supported by IPL. In addition, one EasyLAN interface and one extra
interface board can be fitted, see Chapter 14.
Provision for
Ethernet connector
Provision for one
interface board (IPL
only IEEE 1284)
Wand interface (not
IPL)
Serial port RS-232
USB port (not
used IPL)
Checking Hardware and Firmware

Finally, you may want to inspect the electronics compartment. To do so,
carefully follow the instructions in Chapter 11.
The electronic compartment contains wires and components with
dangerous voltage. Always switch off the power and unplug the power
cord before you remove the cover over the electronics compartment!
Im Elektronikfach gibt es Kabel und Komponenten, die hohe
Spannungen fhren. Immer die Stromversorgung abschalten und
das Netzkabel abziehen, bevor die Abdeckung des Elektronikfachs
abgenommen wird!
In the electronics compartment, check:
Type of CPU board?
- Check number and size of Flash SIMMs.
- Check size of SDRAM SIMM.
Any optional interface board fitted?
- Check type, straps, and optional circuits.
Refer to Chapters 13 and 14 for more information.
The printers come with either Fingerprint v8.xx or IPL v2.xx firmware. The
firmware type and version can be changed with a firmware card or special
software. The keyboard overlay will also need to be changed. The current
firmware type is indicated in the display window.
Fingerprint only
If the printer is working and possible startup program can be interrupted,

the type of program in the printer can be identified. Connect printer
and computer, open a suitable communication program, and start up the
printer in Fingerprints immediate mode. The instructions FILES, FONTS,
and IMAGES will return information about what files, fonts and images
are stored in printer memory. Use the VERSION$ function to check
version of the Intermec Fingerprint firmware.
You can read the setup in the Setup Mode or using Intermec Shell, which
also allows you to print test labels containing the present setup values. To
enter Shell if a custom-made autoexec-file prevents access, lift the printhead
and press and hold any key on the printer's keyboard (except the <Shift>
key) while you turn on the power. When the Shell countdown begins,
release the key and press <Enter> to start Shell. If you want to print test
labels, lower the printhead. Refer to the Users Guide and to Appendix
A in this Service Manual for more information on Setup Mode and the
Intermec Shell startup program.
If the printer still does not work, you may need to interview the user.
IPL only
The Test/Service part of the Setup Mode allows several types of test labels
to be printed (see the Users Guide and Appendix A). IPL also has a number
of commands that return valuable information on the printers status (see
IPL Programming, Reference Manual).
10
1.2 EasyCoder PF2i Specifications

Printing
Print Technique
Direct Thermal (Thermal Transfer as option)
Printhead Resolution
8 dots/mm (203.2 dpi)
Print Speed (variable)
100 to 200 mm/sec. (approx. 4 to 8 in./sec.)
Print Width (max)
56 mm (2.2 in.)
Print Length (max)
32767 dots = 409.5 cm (161.25 in.)
Media Width (min/max)
25 to 60 mm (1.00 to 2.36 in.)
Standard edge guide
40 to 60 mm (1.57 to 2.36 in.)
Quick-Load guides
Media Roll Diameter (max)
213 mm (8.38 in.)
Short door/no takeup
Media Roll Core Diameter
38 to 40 mm (1.5 in.) or 76 mm (3 in.)
Ribbon Width (min/max)
25 to 60 mm (1 to 2.36 in.)
Ribbon Roll Diameter, Outer (max)
65 mm (2.44 in.)
Ribbor Roll Core Diameter, Inner
25.4 mm (1 in.)
Print Directions
= 448 dots
1
240-300 m (787-985 ft)
Modes of Operation
Tear Off (Straight-through)
Yes
Peel Off (Self-strip)
Optional
With liner takeup unit
Operating System
Intermec Fingerprint v8.7x or later
Incl. Direct Protocol
Smooth Fonts
TrueDoc and TrueType fonts
Built-in scaleable fonts (std)
15
Built-in bar code symbologies (std)
45
Startup Program (std)
Intermec Shell v8.0
Firmware (Fingerprint)
Unicode fonts2
Firmware (IPL)
Operating System
IPL v2.7x or later
13 scaleable + 21 simulated bitmap
31
Physical Measures
Dimensions (WLH)
194397178 mm (7.6415.637.00 in.)
Weight (excluding media)
approx. 5.5 kg (12 pounds)
Ambient Operating Temperature
+5C to +40C (+41F to +104F)
Humidity
20 to 80% non-condensing
With long side door
Electronics
Microprocessor
32 bit RISC
On-board Flash SIMMs
2 sockets (for 4 or 8 MB each)
Std. 1 4MB
On-board SDRAM SIMM
1 socket (for 8 or 16 MB)
Std. 1 8MB
Power Supply
AC Voltage
90 to 265 VAC, 45 to 65Hz
PFC Regulation
IEC 61000-3-2
Power Consumption
Standby 15W; Peak 300W
Sensors
Label Gap/Black Mark/Out of Media
Yes
5 fixed positions
EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial Printers Service Manual 11
Printhead Lifted
Yes
Ribbon End/Ribbon Low
Yes (thermal transfer model only)
Controls
Control Lamps
Display
2 16 character LCD with background light
Keyboard
Fingerprint: 22 keys; IPL: 7 keys
Print or Feed/Pause button
Beeper
Yes
Membrane-switch type
Data Interfaces
Serial
1RS-232 + 1USB
Bar Code Wand
Not supported by IPL
Connection for Interface Boards
1+1
1 EasyLAN + 1 other
Memory Card Adapter
CompactFlash cards
Accessories and Options

Thermal Transfer Mechanism
Option
Integral Self-strip Unit w. Liner Takeup
Option
For peel-off operation
Rotating Media Supply Hub
Option
Replaces supply post
3-inch Adapter
Option
For media supply hub
Short Side Door
Option
Long Side Door
Option3
Label Taken Sensor
Option
Real Time Clock
Option
RS-232 Interface Cable
Option
Parallel Interface Cable
Option
IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Board
Option
Double Serial Interface Board
Option (not IPL)
Serial/Industrial Interface Board
Option (not IPL)
EasyLAN Ethernet Interface
Option
Model EasyLAN100i2
EasyLAN Wireless Interface
Option
Model Wireless 100i2
External Alphanumeric Keyboard
Option (not IPL)
CompactFlash Cards
Option
CompactFlash Card Protection Plate
Option
10+ years life
8MB to 1GB
/. The max. print length is also restricted by the amount of free SDRAM memory.
/. Latin, Greek, and Cyrillic fonts according to Unicode standard are included.
3
/. Type of door fitted at delivery depends on model.
1
2
12
1.3 EasyCoder PF4i Specifications

Printing
Print Technique
Thermal Transfer and/or Direct Thermal

11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Standard
Option (not IPL)


11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print Width (max)
104 mm (4.095 in.) = 832 dots

105.7 mm (4.161 in.) = 1248 dots

11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print Length (max)
32767 dots = 409.5 cm (161.25 in.)1
25 to 114.3 mm (1.00 to 4.5 in.)
Standard edge guide
40/80 to 114.3 mm (1.57/3.15 to 4.5 in.)
Quick-Load guides
213 mm (8.38 in.)
Short door/no takeup
38 to 40 mm (1.5 in.) or 76 mm (3 in.)
25 to 110 mm (1 to 4.33 in.)
65 mm (2.44 in.)
25.4 mm (1 in.)
Print Directions
240-300 m (787-985 ft)
Modes of Operation
Yes
Cut Off
Optional
With paper cutter
Optional
Operating System
Smooth Fonts
15
45
Intermec Shell v8.0
Unicode fonts2
Firmware (IPL)
Operating System
IPL v2.7x or later
13 scalable + 21 simulated bitmap
31
Physical Measures
Dimensions (WLH)
244397178 mm (9.6115.637.00 in.)

253447178 mm (9.9617.607.00 in.)
244471225 mm (9.6118.548.86 in.)
approx. 7 to 8 kg (15.5 to 17.7 pounds)
+5C to +40C (+41F to +104F)
Humidity
With long side door

With paper cutter
With 8-in. Megatop
Electronics
Microprocessor
32 bit RISC
Std. 1 4MB
On-board SDRAM SIMM
Std. 1 8MB
Power Supply
AC Voltage
90 to 265 VAC, 45 to 65Hz
PFC Regulation
IEC 61000-3-2
Power Consumption
Sensors
Yes
Printhead Lifted
Yes
Yes (thermal transfer model only)
5 fixed positions
Controls
Control Lamps
Display
Keyboard
Fingerprint: 22 keys; IPL: 7 keys
Print or Feed/Pause button
Beeper
Yes
Data Interfaces
Serial
1RS-232 + 1USB
Bar Code Wand
1+1
1 EasyLAN + 1 other
Memory Card Adapter
CompactFlash cards
Special printheads
8 dots/mm: Thick media

11.81 dots/mm: Standard and Thick media
203.2 dpi
300 dpi (not IPL)
Paper Cutter
Option
For cut-off operation
Paper Cutter Tray
Option
Integral Self-strip Unit w. Liner Takeup
Option
Option
3-inch Adapter
Option
Printhead Spring Kit
Option
For vertical installation
Short Side Door
Option3
Long Side Door
Option3
Long side door with 8-inch Megatop
Option3
Label Taken Sensor
Option
Real Time Clock
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option (not IPL)
Option (not IPL)
Option
Model EasyLAN100i2
Option
Model Wireless100i2
Option (not IPL)
CompactFlash Cards
Option
Compact Flash Card Protection Plate
Option
10+ years life
8MB to 1GB; not CF+
3
1
2
14
1.4 EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Specifications

Printing
Print Technique
Direct Thermal and Thermal Transfer

11.81 dots/mm (300dpi)
Standard
Option (not IPL)


11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print Width (max)
104 mm (4.095 in.) = 832 dots

105.7 mm (4.161 in.) = 1248 dots

11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Print Length (max)
32767 dots = 409.5 cm (161.25 in.)1
25 to 114.3 mm (1.00 to 4.5 in.)
Standard edge guide
40/80 to 114.3 mm (1.57/3.15 to 4.5 in.)
Quick-Load guides
152 mm (6 in.)
213 mm (8.38 in.)
Long side door

Megatop
38 to 40 mm (1.5 in.) or 76 mm (3 in.)
25 to 110 mm (1 to 4.33 in.)
65 mm (2.44 in.)
25.4 mm (1 in.)
Print Directions
240-300 m (787-985 ft)
Modes of Operation
Yes
Cut Off
Optional
With paper cutter
Optional
Operating System
Smooth Fonts
15
45
Intermec Shell v8.0
Unicode fonts2
Firmware (IPL)
Operating System
IPL v2.7x or later
13 scaleable + 21 simulated bitmap
31
Physical Measures
Dimensions (WLH)
244405178 mm (9.6115.937.00 in.)
With long side door
253447178 mm (9.9617.607.00 in.)
With paper cutter
244475225 mm (9.6118.708.86 in.)
With 8-in. Megatop
approx. 7 to 8 kg (15.5 to 17.7 pounds)
Depending on model
+5C to +40C (+41F to +104F)
Humidity
Electronics
Microprocessor
32 bit RISC
Std. 1 4MB
On-board SDRAM SIMM
Std. 1 8MB
Power Supply
AC Voltage
90 to 265 VAC, 45 to 65Hz
PFC Regulation
IEC 61000-3-2
Power Consumption
Sensors
Yes
Printhead Lifted
Yes
Yes
5 fixed positions
Controls
Control Lamps
Display
Keyboard
Fingerprint: 22 keys; IPL; 7 keys
Print button
Beeper
Yes
Data Interfaces
Serial
1RS-232 + 1USB
Bar Code Wand
1+1
1 EasyLAN + 1 other
Memory Card Adapter
CompactFlash cards
Special Printheads
8 dots/mm: Thick media

11.81 dots/mm: Standard and Thick media
203.2 dpi
300 dpi (not IPL)
Paper Cutter
Option
Paper Cutter Tray
Option
Intergral Self-strip Unit w. Liner Takeup
Option
Option
3-inch Adapter
Option
Long Side Door
Option
Long Side Door with 8-inch Megatop
Option3
Label Taken Sensor
Option
Real Time Clock
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option (not IPL)
Option (not IPL)
Option
Model EasyLAN100i2
Option
Model Wireless100i2
Option (not IPL)
CompactFlash Cards
Option
CompactFlash Card Protection Plate
Option
10+ years life
8MB to 1GB; not CF+
3
1
2
16
1.5 EasyCoder PF2i Dimensions

Long Side Door
At least 60 mm (2.3 inches) of free space behind

the printer is required for the connectors, and for
inserting and removing a memory card.
18
Short Side Door

20
1.6 EasyCoder PF4i Dimensions

Long Side Door

21
22
Short Side Door

23
24
Megatop
At least 250 mm (10 inches) of free space behind

the printer is required for opening the Megatop
canopy.
25
26
Paper Cutter
132 mm (5.20")
447.0 mm (1
7.60")
253 mm (9.96")
27
All PF4i (except Megatop and Cutter)
Drawing illustrates an EasyCoder PF4i with a short side door.
28
1.7 EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Dimensions

Long Side Door

the printer is required for the connectors, and
for inserting and removing a memory card.
To open the front door, a free space of 80 mm
(3.15 inches) is required.
29
30
Megatop
At least 250 mm (10 inches) of free space

behind the printer is required for opening the
Megatop canopy. To open the front door, a
free space of 80 mm (3.15 inches) is required.
32
Paper Cutter
132 mm (5.20")
447.0 mm (1
7.60")
253 mm (9.96")
All PF4i Compact Industrial (except Megatop and Cutter)
34
Front and Keyboard
The entire chapter applies to EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact
Industrial. The only difference is the printing on the keyboard overlay.
Chapter 2Front and Keyboard
2.1 Front
The front and left-hand moulding is made of magnesium as a single
integrated unit which covers the front of the printer and the electronics
compartment. The entire moulding is illustrated in Chapter 3.
The front contains:
The print button.
The membrane-switch keyboard with overlay.
The console pcb.
Moulding
Insert keyboard
cables here
Self-adhesive overlay
Print button
Grub Screw
Membrane keyboard
Locking washers
Console pcb.
2.2 Print Button

The print button is mounted so the hinges and the arm are inserted
through slots in the moulding. The hinges are affixed to pins in the
moulding using two self-locking washers. When removing the print
button, the locking washers must be cut apart using a pair of cutting
pliers. The arm goes under the console pcb and activates a switch at the
back of the board when the button is pressed. A grub screw at the end of
the arm allows fine-adjustment.
36
2.3 Keyboard
Keyboard Overlay
The keyboard overlay has a non-permanent adhesive to allow easy
replacement. Custom-made overlays could also be printed and used to
replace the standard overlays for customized applications or in areas, where
the English text is not acceptable.
Example of a Fingerprint keyboard overlay
Keyboard
Example of an IPL keyboard overlay
The keyboard is of membrane switch type and is glued to the moulding.

There are 22 switches. The keys have fixed functions in the immediate
and setup modes, but can also be assigned various functions in Intermec
Fingerprint programs. In IPL, the keys are not user-programmable.
To replace the keyboard
1 Carefully peel away the present keyboard overlay.
2 Disconnect the cables from P2 and P3 on the console pcb by pulling up
the connector heads.
3 Use isopropyl alcohol to remove any adhesive residue.
4 Route the cables of the new keyboard through the slots in the moulding.
5 Remove the liner and press-affix the self-adhesive keyboard, starting
with the upper edge. Press forcefully along the edges.
6 Insert the cables into the connectors of the console pcb and press down
the connector heads. Check that the cables are securely locked.
2.4 Console pcb.

The console pcb contains an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), three LED
(Light Emitting Diode) control lamps, and the Print button switch. It also
serves as a connection point between the keyboard and the I2C bus on the
CPU board.
The display has 2 16 character with a 5 7 dot matrix and background
light. 8 characters are programmable.
The left-hand LED control lamp (marked Power) turns green when the
power is on. Power on is also indicated by the displays background light.
The other two LEDs are programmable using the Fingerprint instructions
LED ON and LED OFF. The center LED (marked Ready) is green and
blinks when data are received. The right-hand LED (marked Error) is
red.
The console pcb is connected to J50 at the front of the CPU board via a
permanently fitted 10-p flat cable. This cable must be disconnected from
the CPU board before the cover can be entirely removed. There are also
two connectors (P2 and P3) for the cables from the keyboard.
When removing the console pcb, the locking washers must be cut apart.
38
T2
E
R11
P3
P2
P1
R12
C4
R1
R9
B
C
D4
T3
R5
R4
R7
R8
NC
R35
C1
C3
C2
R13
IC1
R6
R15
R16
R32
R31
R30
R33
R34
C16
C15
C14
C12
C5
R14
R23
C6
R17
R24
C7
R18
R25
C8
R19
R27
R26
C9
R20
R21 C10
R22 C11
R28
R29
C13
R3
R2
T1
E
R10
1-971633-25 Console pcb.; Components
P4
P5
SW1
Component Side
D3
D1
D2
DISP1
Soldering Side
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P1
VCC
SCL
SDA
I2C_NOTIFY
RESET
LED2
LED1
VCC
R1
R2
R3
R34
T1
VDISP
R/W
RS
E
DISP1
T2
3
5
4
6
15
K
DISPLAY
16
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
D3
D1
D2
C1
2
VCC
GND
R12
R11
R10
R9
R8
R35
R4
R5
R7
VCC
T3
VCC
R13
C2
VCC
VCC
VCC
D4
R15
C3
R16
VCC
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19
20
VCC
D4
D5
D6
D7
E
RS
9
10
INT/RB0
RB1
RB2
MCLR/VPP
RB3
RB4
RB5
RA0
RB6
RA1
RB7
RA2
RA3/VREF
RA4/T0CKI
RC0
RA5
RC1
RC2
RC3
RC4
VCC
RC5
RC6
GND
RC7
GND
CLKIN
CLKOUT
PIC16F872
IC1
COL0
COLSH
COL1
COL2
COL3
COL4
ROW4
ROW3
ROW2
ROW1
ROW0
SCL
SDA
NOTIFY
R/W
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
VCC
C7
VCC
C6
40
C16
SW1
R29
R30
R31
R32
R33
R23
R24
R25
R26
R27
R28
VPP
1
2
P5
1
2
3
4
5
6
P2
1
2
3
4
5
6
P3
1
2
3
4
5
P4
VCC
IN-CIRCUIT SERIAL PROGRAMMING
1-971633-25 Console pcb.; Schematics
C14
C15
C12
C13
C10
C11
C8
C9
R22
R21
R20
R19
R18
R17
R14
R6
C5
C4
Covers and Doors
This chapter describes the various types of covers and doors used on the
EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial printers. It covers the
following topics:
The right-hand doors that cover the print mechanism and media
compartment.
The front and left-hand cover that contains the console and protects the
electronics compartment.
The front door, that protects the front of the print mechanism in
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial printers.
41
Chapter 3Covers and Doors
3.1 Right-Hand Doors

The EasyCoder PF2i comes with two types of right-hand doors, the
EasyCoder PF4i with three types, and the EasyCoder PF4i Compact
Industrial with two types:
EasyCoder PF2i
A long door that entirely encloses the media compartment and print
mechanism. The long door protects the media, but restricts the diameter
of the media roll to maximum 152 mm (6 inches).
A short door that only encloses the print mechanism, but leaves the
media compartment open for easy access. The short door is used in
connection with quick-load guides, or when an extra large media roll
is used without any need for full enclosure. Maximum diameter of the
media roll is 203 mm (8.00 inches).
EasyCoder PF4i
A short door that only encloses the print mechanism, but leaves the
media compartment open for easy access. The short door is used in
connection with quick-load guides, or when an extra large media roll
is used without any need for full enclosure. Maximum diameter of the
A long door the entirely encloses the media compartment and print
of the media roll to a maximum of 152 mm (6 inches).
A long door with a hinged transparent canopy (Megatop) that can
accommodate an internal 8-inch media roll. Maximum diameter of the

A long door the entirely encloses the media compartment and print
of the media roll to maximum 152 mm (6 inches).
A long door with a hinged transparent canopy (Megatop) that can
accommodate an internal 8-inch media roll. Maximum diameter of the
All right-hand doors are made of magnesium and hinged to the bottom
plate. EasyCoder PF2i and PF4i have plastic hinges to which the doors can
be snap-locked, whereas EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial has metal
hinges permanently affixed to the side doors and screwed to the bottom
plate. The rear part of the Megatop always has plastic hinges. The doors can
be folded down 180 to a vertical position, while the Megatop transparent
canopy is folded backward after the side door has been opened. The doors
are kept shut by a magnetic lock glued to the top of the front/left hand
cover.
42
EasyCoder PF2i
Magnetic lock
3
2
1
4
bw
fw
Front hinge
Short door
Rear hinge
EasyCoder PF2i with a short side door.
Magnetic lock
3
2
1
4
bw
fw
Front hinge
Hinge not used
Long door
Rear hinge
EasyCoder PF2i with a long side door.
43
EasyCoder PF4i
Magnetic lock
Front hinge
Short door
Rear hinge
EasyCoder PF4i with a short side door.
Magnetic lock
Front hinge
(rear hinge hidden)
Long door
EasyCoder PF4i with a long side door.
44
Transparent part
8-inch Megatop roll cover
Magnetic lock
Hinges
Hinge
Side door for 8-inch
Megatop
EasyCoder PF4i with an 8-inch Megatop.
45

Magnetic lock
Metal hinge
(rear hinge hidden)
Long door
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial with a long side door.

Transparent part
8-inch Megatop roll cover
Magnetic lock
Plastic hinges
Metal hinges
Side door for 8-inch Megatop
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial with an 8-inch Megatop.
46
3.2 Front and Left-Hand Cover

All Models
The front/left-hand cover is made of magnesium and is fitted with a
number of user interface devices, see Chapter 2.
Removing the front/left-hand cover gives access to:
The electronics incl. CPU board, AC connection, power supply, and any
optional interface pcb.
The motor, belts, and pulleys of the media feed and the optional liner
takeup unit and ribbon feed motor.
The left-hand cover plate is fitted to the center section using three #T20
Torx screws accessible from the media compartment.
To remove the cover

1 Disconnect the power cord and open the right-hand door.
dangerous voltage (up to 380V). Always switch off the power
and unplug the power cord before you remove the cover over the
electronics compartment!
Spannungen (bis zu 380 V) fhren. Immer die Stromversorgung
abschalten und das Netzkabel abziehen, bevor die Abdeckung des
Elektronikfachs abgenommen wird!
2 Use a #T20 Torx screwdriver to remove the three screws and lift the
cover up so it disengages the bottom plate.
47
3 Carefully move the rear part of the cover out so you can disconnect the
console cable from the CPU board.
4 Put the cover aside on a soft cloth or similar to avoid scratches.
5 When putting back the left-hand cover, route the cable from the display
unit above the ribbon motor (if any).
This prevents it from interfering with the print button. Connect the cable
to connector J50 at the upper right corner of the CPU board. Make sure
that the stiffeners inside the cover engage the bottom plate before fitting
back the three Torx screws.
3.3 Front Door

EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial only
The front door protects the print mechanism and makes it possible to tear
off the media either upwards or downwards. The front door is affixed by
two expanding rivets to the upper side of the bottom plate. It cannot be
used together with a cutter.
The door can be tilted down to facilitate media and ribbon load.
Tear-Off edge
Expanding rivet
Front door of EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial
48
Chassis
This chapter describes the center section, bottom plate, rubber feet,
and hinges of the EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial
printers.
49
Chapter 4Chassis
4.1 Description
The printers chassis consists of two main parts:
The center section
The bottom plate
The center section and the rubber feet are common for EasyCoder PF2i,
PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial. EasyCoder PF2i and PF4i have plastic
hinges whereas EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial has metal hinges, see
Section 4.4.
Center section
EasyCoder PF2i
Provision for
Megatop
canopy
hinges
EasyCoder PF4i and

PF4i Compact Industrial
Provision for
rear hinge
in case of
long door
or Megatop
Bottom plate
Provision
for cutter or
front door
#T20 Torx screws (x4)
50
Plastic hinge (always fitted in PF2i and

PF4i, but only used for short door)
Rubber foot (enlarged)
Rubber foot (x4)
Plastic hinge (always fitted in PF2i and PF4i)
EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Printers Industrial Service Manual
Chapter 4Chassis
4.2 Center Section

The center section is made of moulded magnesium and is used for fitting
most parts, such as the print mechanism, the transfer ribbon mechanism,
the liner takeup unit, and the media supply. The center section is fitted to
the bottom plate by a total of four #T20 Torx screws.
In the electronics compartment, the CPU board and power supply unit are
fitted to the center section. The power supply unit is also attached to the
bottom plate using two screws.
dangerous voltage (up to 380V). Always switch off the power and
unplug the power cord before you remove the cover over the electronics
compartment!
4.3 Bottom Plate

The bottom plate is fitted with four easily replaceable rubber feet. These
feet could be removed and the holes be used to bolt the printer to a frame,
table or similar. The holes have a diameter of 7.1 mm (0.28 inches). To
reduce noise, fit rubber dampeners between the table and the printer if you
bolt it in place.
Chapter 4Chassis
When fitting a replacement foot, insert it through the bottom plate and
firmly press the pin so the rivet expands on the upper side of the plate.
The two keyholes should not be used to bolt the printer to a frame, or the
bottom plate may be bent. These holes are only used for fixtures during
manufacturing.
4.4 Hinges
EasyCoder PF2i and PF4i have plastic hinges which are affixed to the
bottom plate by an expanding rivet, similar to the rubber feet. Both front
hinges are always fitted (even if the rear one of these two is only used in
case of a short side door), whereas the rear third hinge is only fitted in
case of a long side door or an 8-inch Megatop door. Two holes at the rear
edge of the EasyCoder PF4i bottom plate allow the hinges of the 8-inch
Megatop canopy to be fitted in a similar way.
The frontmost hinge is fitted with a grounding foil to help avoid
electrostatic discharges. On the door, the paint is removed from the area in
contact with the grounding foil.
Grounding foil
In EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial, the hinges are made of metal and
are permanently affixed to the doors. They are fitted to the bottom plate so
they embrace its edge and are secured using #T20 Torx screws. There are
no grounding foils.
#T20 Torx screw
52
EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Printers Industrial Service Manual
Media Supply
This chapter explains the various media supply roll posts and rotating
media supply hubs, and also the different types of adjustable media edge
guides. It also shows how an external media supply can be used.
Chapter 5Media Supply
5.1 Internal Supply

Being of a modular design for maximum flexibility, the EasyCoder PF2i,
PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial can use either a media supply roll
post or a rotating media supply hub fitted in different positions inside
the media compartment, depending on the type of side door (long, short,
or Megatop) and whether or not the printer is fitted with a takeup unit
for the liner (backing paper). Alternatively, an external media supply (for
example a box of fan-folded tickets) behind the printer can be used (not
with Megatop).
Media Supply Roll Post

The media supply roll post fits both 38 to 40 mm (1.5 inch) and 76 mm
(3 inches) media roll cores because the post can be moved vertically in a
slot in the center section. The bottom position is used for small cores and
the top position is used for large cores. The post is locked by a straightslot screw and has an edge guide that can be moved laterally to fit various
media widths andin case of EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrialalso be
folded down to a horizonal position to facilitate media load.
Note: EasyCoder PF2i and PF4i only. If the post is fitted in the upper
position, the locking screw will interfere with small cores, causing media
misalignment. Always fit the post in its proper position depending on the
size of the media roll core.
The media supply roll post gives better performance than the rotating
media supply hub, giving a nearly constant slippage from full to empty
media roll.
To move the post, remove the screw, twist the post a quarter of a turn and
pull it out. To fit it in another slot, rotate it a quarter of a turn and twist
back so the lips engage the cut-outs in the sides of the slot. Move it up (3inch core) or down (1.5-inch core) as far as it goes and secure it with the
screw.
76 mm (3 in.)
core
76 mm (3 in.)
core
38-40 mm (1.5 in.)

core
38-40 mm (1.5 in.)

core
Edge guide
Edge guide
Screw
Screw

for EasyCoder PF2i
54

for EasyCoder PF4i
Media Supply Roll Post for Easy-Coder

Media Supply Hub

The rotating media supply hub is locked by a clip onto a threaded shaft.
The shaft can be fitted in a hole below each of the slots for the media roll
supply post. To remove the hub from the shaft, disengage the clip and pull
out the hub. When fitting or removing the shaft, protect it using a piece of
tape or similar to avoid dents and marks.
The hub is design to fit media roll cores with an internal diameter of 38 to
40 mm (1.5 inches). 76 mm (3 inches) cores can also be accepted by fitting
an adapter on the hub. Secure the adapter on the hub by means of the
locking screw, making sure that the screw hits an even plastic surface on
the hub (not a metal leaf-spring).
The media supply hub is particularly useful when the printer cannot be
placed on a horizontal surface. If an EasyCoder PF4i printer is installed
in a more or less vertical attitude, the media supply spool should be
supplemented with an optional spring that prevents the printhead from
coming loose when opened. Refer to Sections 7.1 and 7.6.
Note: The combination of high print speed and the momentum of large
and heavy media roll may cause slacks and jerks in the media that may
impair the printout quality, especially when printing ladder style bar codes
(that is, with bars running across the media path). Refer to the chapter
Setting Up the Printer in the Users Guide for recommended maximum
print speeds.
Locking screw
3-inch adapter
Hub
0 mm
38-4inch)
(1.5
m
76 mes)
h
c
(3 in
0 mm
38-4inch)
(1.5
m
76 mes)
h
c
(3 in
Shaft
Clip
Media Supply Hub

for EasyCoder PF2i
Media Supply Hub

for EasyCoder PF4i
and PF4i Compact Industrial
Media Supply Positions

There are four sets of slots and threaded holes in the printers center section
for the media supply roll post or the optional rotating media supply
hub. These slots and holes allow the largest possible roll to fit given the
limitations of the liner takeup unit and/or the full enclosure provided by
the long side door. The positions are indicated by numbers engraved in the
center section.
Position #1 is used when the media compartment is fully enclosed by
a long side door, regardless of the existence of any liner takeup unit.
Maximum roll size is 152 mm (6 inches).
Position #2 is used when the printer has a short side door that only
encloses the print mechanism, but it excludes any liner takeup unit.
Maximum roll size is 203 mm (8.00 inches). This position is not used in
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial, which do not use short side doors.
Position #3 is used with a short side door and an optional liner takeup
unit. Position #3 is also used with the optional 8-inch Megatop
(EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial only.) Maximum roll
size is 213 mm (8.38 inches).
Position #4 is not used.
Pos. #3
Pos. #2
2
1
4
Pos. #1
(Pos. #4)
56
5.2 Media Guides

Standard Edge Guide
The standard edge guide can be moved sideways on its shaft to fit different
media widths. It can also be rotated between horizontal attitude for most
types of internal media supplies and vertical attitude for external media
supply.
EasyCoder PF2i
Standard edge guide
EasyCoder PF4i
EasyCoder PF4i
Compact Industrial
Quick-Load Guides
The standard edge guide can be replaced with a set of Quick-Load guides.
There are two types: narrow and wide. EasyCoder PF2i can only use the
narrow type, whereas EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial can
use both (even if the wide type is preferred.) The Quick-Load guides allow
the media to be loaded into the print mechanism without opening the
short side door.
Quick-Load guides cannot be used in connection with peel-off (self-strip)
operation, that is, when the liner (backing paper) is wound up inside the
printer (see Chapter 8).
With special application software, it is possible to make the media
automatically being pulled through the print mechanism.
Quick-Load guides are useful for external media supplies, because they
guide the media better than the standard edge guide.
The Quick-Load guides are fitted on the same shaft as the standard edge
guide and the outer guide is laterally adjustable to fit various media widths:
EasyCoder PF2i
Narrow guides:
40 to 60 mm (1.57 to 2.36 inches)
EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial
Narrow guides: 40 to 114.3 mm (1.57 to 4.5 inches)

Wide guides: 80 to 144.3 mm (3.15 to 4.5 inches)
The EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial are normally
delivered with both narrow and wide guides. It is possible to combine
one narrow and one wide guide.
58
EasyCoder PF2i
Narrow Quick-Load guides
EasyCoder PF4i and

Wide Quick-Load guides
EasyCoder PF4i and

5.3 External Supply

Regardless what types of internal media supply devices, right-hand doors,
or media guides are fitted in the EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, or PF4i Compact
Industrial, it is possible to use an external supply placed behind the printer.
However, you cannot use an external supply when the printer is fitted with
an 8-inch Megatop.
Usually, external supply is used for fan-folded tickets or tags. A set of
Quick-Load guides and possibly a short side door are recommended.
When using the standard edge guide, it is recommended to rotate the
guide to a vertical attitude.
When using an external supply, make sure to protect direct thermal media
from dirt, dust, direct sunlight, and any substances that may affect the
heat-sensitive layer.
60
Transfer Ribbon Mechanism
This chapter describes the mechanism that drives the thermal transfer
ribbon in the transfer-printing capable models of the EasyCoder PF2i,
PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial printers. It covers the following topics:
Description
Ribbon supply unit
Ribbon rewind unit
Ribbon sensor
Ribbon motor
Front ribbon break shaft
Rear ribbon break shaft
Printhead ribbon break shaft
Chapter 6Transfer Ribbon Mechanism
6.1 Description
The thermal transfer ribbon mechanism is standard in EasyCoder PF4i
and PF4i Compact Industrial and optional in EasyCoder PF2i. When no
transfer ribbon mechanism is fitted, the recesses in the center section are
covered by plastic caps, see Section 1.1. The mechanism consists of seven
main parts:
Ribbon supply unit (see Section 6.2)
Ribbon rewind unit (see Section 6.3)
Ribbon sensor (see Section 6.4)
Ribbon motor assy. with gearbox (see Section 6.5)
Adjustable front ribbon break shaft (see Section 6.6)
Rear ribbon break shaft with cable guard (see Section 6.7)
(retained on direct thermal printing models of EasyCoder PF4i)
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial has a cable guard that is integrated
in the headlift mechanism.
Printhead ribbon break shaft (see Section 6.8)
(retained on direct thermal printing models of EasyCoder PF4i)
Ribbon sensor (hidden)
Ribbon supply unit

Ribbon rewind unit
Ribbon motor assy.
Cable guard
Rear ribbon break shaft
Printhead ribbon break shaft
EasyCoder PF4i
62
6.2 Ribbon Supply Unit

Description
The ribbon supply unit accommodates the supply of thermal transfer
ribbon. For troublefree printing, use ribbons recommended by Intermec.
Ribbon Specifications
Width (PF2i):
Width (PF4i & PF4i CI):
Roll diameter (outer), max.:
Roll core diameter (inner):
Ribbon length, max.:
25 to 60 mm (1 to 3.36 in.)
25 to 110 mm (1 to 4.33 in.)
62 mm (2.44 in.)
25.4 mm (1.00 in.)
approx. 200 m (650 ft)
The unit is designed to keep the ribbon tight all the time in order to avoid
wrinkling and creases, which would ruin the printout. It consists of a shaft,
screwed into the center section, on which a bobbin is snap-locked. Inside
the bobbin is a hub with a tab that engages a hole in the center section and
a spring clutch. The bobbin is fitted with a plate that holds the cardboard
core of the ribbon roll.
Inside the inner end of the bobbin is a pattern of reflecting and nonreflecting sectors by means of which the ribbon sensor can detect the
rotation of the bobbin.
When the bobbin is rotated, the spring clutch is unwound and tries to pull
the ribbon back onto the roll. As the pulling force increases, the clutch
starts to slip and the ribbon can be unwound while still being kept tight.
The bobbin can rotate in both directions. Thus, ribbons wound with the
ink-coated side facing either inwards or outwards can be used.
Bobbin (PF2i)
Spring clutch
Hub
Tab
Ribbon
sensor
Detection pattern
Bobbin (PF4i)
Shaft
Bobbin plate
To replace the ribbon supply unit

1 Pry the two legs of the snap-lock in the bobbin apart using a pair of flattipped screwdrivers while pulling out the bobbin with the spring clutch
and hub. Avoid removing the hub and spring clutch from the bobbin.
2 If the shaft needs to be removed, use a piece of isolating tape to protect
the shaft from being scratched by the tool.
3 Reassemble in reverse order.
64
6.3 Ribbon Rewind Unit

Description
For logistic reasons, the ribbon rewind unit consists of the same parts as
the ribbon supply unit (see Section 6.2) with the exception that there is no
spring clutch.
The ribbon rewind bobbin winds up the used ribbon on its cardboard
core after printing. It is driven via a gearbox by the ribbon motor. A gear
wheel in the gearbox engages the cogs along the rim of the inner part of
the bobbin. The bobbin rotates counterclockwise to wind up the ribbon
during printing or clockwise to allow the ribbon to follow the media when
it is pulled back.
Bobbin (PF2i)
Hub
Tab
Shaft
Bobbin (PF4i)
Bobbin plate
To replace the ribbon rewind unit

1 Pry the two legs of the snap-lock in the bobbin apart using a pair of flattipped screwdrivers. At the same time, pull out the bobbin.
2 Remove the hub from the shaft, if necessary.
3 If the shaft needs to be removed, use a piece of isolating tape to protect
the shaft from being scratched by the tool.
4 Reassemble in reverse order. Take care so the cogs along the rim of the
bobbin engage the gear wheel in the gearbox properly.
6.4 Ribbon Sensor

Description
The ribbon sensor is snap-locked to the center section from the media
compartment side and is completely enclosed by the ribbon supply unit
(see Section 6.2). The sensor consists of a plastic housing with a LED and a
photoelectric sensor.
The light from the LED is alternately reflected or absorbed by black and
silver-colored sectors on a label fitted at the inner end of the ribbon supply
bobbin. The signals from the sensor allow the firmware to detect the speed
with which the bobbin rotates and compare it with the speed of the media
feed.
If no bobbin rotation is detected during media feed, the Fingerprint
firmware assumes an error condition (error 1027 Out of transfer ribbon)
provided the printer is set for thermal transfer printing. In IPL, the error
message Ribbon out is displayed
When the printer is set for direct thermal printing, the ribbon motor
is switched off and the takeup will not work. If a ribbon is nevertheless
loaded, it will be pulled out in front of the printer by the advancing media
without any warning.
The ribbon sensor is connected to J56 on the CPU board (see Section
13.3).
Housing
Snap-locks
To replace the ribbon sensor

1 Open the media compartment door.
LED and sensor
2 Remove the cover over the electronics compartment as described in

Section 10.2, taking all precautions against electric shock.
3 Remove any transfer ribbon from the ribbon supply unit.
4 Remove the ribbon supply bobbin with hub and spring clutch as
described in Section 6.2.
5 Disconnect the sensors cable from J56 on the CPU board.
6 From inside the electronics compartment, compress the snap-locks and
pry out the sensor into the media compartment.
7 Install a replacement sensor unit in reverse order.
66
Adjustment (Fingerprint)
Low diameter
In the Setup Mode, it is possible to specify the diameter (in millimeters) of

the ribbon supply roll, where a ribbon low condition should be detected.
By default, this parameter (Media/Paper Type/Transfer/Low Diameter, see
Appendix A) is set to 0, which disables the function. To enable it, enter the
desired value.
By reading SYSVAR(26) in a Fingerprint application program, the status of
the ribbon low sensor can be polled. SYSVAR(26) returns 0 if the diameter
of the ribbon supply roll is greater and 1 if it is less than the value entered
in the Setup Mode.
Note that a full forward rotation of the supply bobbin must have been
completed. If not, 0 will be returned.
Note: When the ribbon low function is enabled, error condition 1083
Ribbon low is reported every tenth time SYSVAR(26) = 1 is detected in
connection with a PRINTFEED.
To adjust the sensitivity of the ribbon sensor
1 Enter the Setup Mode and follow the path:
2 Media/Paper Type/Transfer/Ribbon Sensor
3 In the Ribbon Sensor menu, press <Enter> to perform a Testfeed.
4 The printer will feed out a few labels and feed the ribbon accordingly.
5 While the ribbon mechanism is operating, the ribbon sensor is
autoadjusted and the resulting adjustment value is shown in the lower
line of the menu (read-only).
Adjustment (IPL)
There is no facility for adjusting the low diameter or the sensitivity of the
ribbon sensor in IPL.
6.5 Ribbon Motor

Description
The ribbon motor assy consists of a 24 VDC motor with a gearbox. The
gearbox engages the cogs along the rim of the ribbon rewind bobbin and
rotates it in either direction according to the polarity of the power.
The power comes to the ribbon motor via a cable connected to P6 on the
Power Supply Unit.
The ribbon motor assembly is a complete unit and should not be taken
apart. It is fitted to the electronics compartment side of the center section
using three #T20 Torx screws.
DC motor
Gearbox
#T20 Torx screws (3)
68
6.6 Front Ribbon Break Shaft

Description
The front ribbon break shaft serves two purposes: to keep the ribbon away
from the print mechanism and to compensate for any lack of parallelity
in the other parts of the ribbon mechanism. The shaft is screwed into a
plate inside the center section. The shaft and the plate can be tilted using
a straight-slot screw from the media compartment (also see last illustration
in Section 7.1).
If the ribbon tends to slide outwards, turn the screw carefully clockwise
(fw) to move the outer end of the break shaft forward.
If the ribbon tends to slide inwards, turn the screw carefully
counterclockwise (bw) to move the outer end of the break shaft
backward.
Before you attempt to adjust the break shaft, make sure that the ribbon
wrinkling is not caused by something else (see Section 16.12).
Bevor versucht wird, die Bruchwelle einzustellen, sicherstellen, dass es
keinen anderen Grund fr das zerknitterte Band gibt (siehe Abschnitt
16.12).
Adjustment screw
EasyCoder PF4i
6.7 Rear Ribbon Break Shaft

Description
The rear ribbon break shaft keeps the thermal transfer ribbon away from
the rear part of the print mechanism and supports the cable guard that
prevents the printhead cables from interfering with the transfer ribbon.
The shaft is screwed into the center section whereas the cable guard is snaplocked in the hole through the center section where the printhead cables
run.
Note: For practical reasons, the printhead ribbon break shaft is fitted on
both thermal transfer and direct thermal models of EasyCoder PF4i. In
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial, the headlift mechanism also serves as
a cable guard.
Snap-locks
Cable guard PF2i
Cable guard PF4i
Break shaft PF2i

Break shaft PF4i
To remove the cable guard (not EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial)

1 Before you pull out the lower guide assembly, you must remove the
cable guard. This is done, for example, in connection with replacing the
LSS sensors (see Section 7.5).
2 From the electronics compartment, disengage the snap-lock with a
slotted screwdriver and pull out the cable guard.
3 When putting back the cable guard, let it slide along the shaft and press
until the snap-lock engages the center section.
70
6.8 Printhead Ribbon Break Shaft

Description
The printhead ribbon break shaft keeps the ribbon away from the front
edge of the printhead and minimizes the friction. The shaft is fitted
between the two gables of the printhead bracket. The inner gable has a Dshaped hole and the outer gable has a round hole. The shaft is held in place
by a plastic clip inside the outer gable.
When a printhead ribbon break shaft is fitted, you cannot tear off the
media in an upward movement, something that is otherwise possible, even
if it is not recommended unless the printer has a front door.
Note: For practical reasons, the printhead ribbon break shaft is fitted
on both thermal transfer and direct thermal models of EasyCoder PF4i.
However, when replacing the printhead of an EasyCoder PF2i with
thermal transfer mechanism, it is necessary to move the printhead riibbon
break shaft from the old to the new printhead.
Inner gable
D-plane
Break shaft
Plastic clip (hidden)

Outer gable
To replace the ribbon break shaft

1 Pry away the plastic clip, taking care not to lose it.
2 Pull the shaft in the direction towards the outer gable until it disengages
from the inner gable.
3 Tilt out the inner end so it can bypass the inner gable and pull it out of
the outer gable.
4 Reassemble in reverse order taking care so the D-plane on the shaft fits
into the D-shaped hole in the inner gable.
72
Print Mechanism
This chapter describes the print mechanism of EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and
PF4i Compact Industrial printers and explains how to adjust the various
functions and replace parts subject to wear. It covers the following topics:
Description
Platen roller
Stepper motor
Belts
Label stop sensor
Printhead
Headlift sensor
Headlift mechanism
Media feed principles
Chapter 7Print Mechanism
7.1 Description
The print mechanism is fully integrated with center section (see Section
4.2), the transfer ribbon mechanism (see Chapter 6), and optional liner
takeup unit (see Chapter 8).
The main parts of the print mechanism are:
The rubber-coated platen roller drives the media past the printhead and
provides counter-pressure.
The liner drive roller is used for peel-off operation and helps pulling the
liner towards the takeup unit.
The stepper motor drives the platen roller and the liner drive roller via
two timing belts inside the electronics compartment. It also drives the
optional liner takeup unit via a third belt running inside the center
section. The liner drive roller and the takeup unit belt are always fitted.
The tear bar makes it easier to tear off continuous stock. It also helps
separate labels and liner during peel-off printing.
The label stop sensor (LSS) controls the media feed and checks for outof-media conditions.
The printhead produces the heat that blackens the direct thermal media
or melts the ink of the transfer ribbon in bitmap patterns that make up
letters, graphics, or bar codes.
The headlift mechanism presses the printhead against the direct thermal
media or thermal transfer ribbon, or raises the printhead to allow media
and ribbon replenishment.
74
The parts of the print mechanism, as seen from the media compartment
side of the center section, are illustrated below.
Headlift mechanism
1
4
Pressure arm
Stepper motor,
belts, and pulleys
Headlift lever
bw
fw
Printhead
Upper label stop sensor
Printhead bracket
Media guide assy with LSS
Print mechanism in an EasyCoder PF2i (direct thermal version)

Ribbon motor
Front ribbon
break shaft
Printhead ribbon
break shaft
Tear bar
Optional spring
for vertical installation
Platen roller
Liner drive roller

Guide link
Printhead
cable
Print mechanism in an EasyCoder PF4i (thermal transfer version)
Ribbon motor
Front ribbon
break shaft
Printhead ribbon
break shaft
Tear bar
Platen roller
Liner drive roller
Printhead cable
Guide link
Print mechanism in an EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial

(doors omitted)
76
The parts of the print mechanism fitted inside the electronics compartment
in an EasyCoder PF4i thermal transfer printer are illustrated below. In an
EasyCoder PF2i, the ribbon mechanism is optional. Otherwise, the parts
on the left side of the center section are identical in EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i,
and PF4i Compact Industrial.
Headlift linkage
Ribbon mechanism
(optional in EasyCoder PF2i)
Pulley & belt

(Platen roller)
Headlift sensor
Pulley & belt

(Liner drive roller)
Stepper motor
7.2 Platen Roller

Description
The platen roller is coated with silicon rubber. It is imperative that the
roller is kept clean and is free from uneven wear or dents. The platen roller
is identical to the liner drive roller, so these rollers could be switched. The
same applies to the pulleys and belts. It is normal that the platen roller
needs to be replaced after a period of time depending on print volume and
other circumstances. The roller is supported by two permanently lubricated
plain bearings pressed into the center section.
Be careful not to rotate the platen roller manually when the power is
switched on, as this may damage the stepper motor driver on the power
supply unit (see Chapter 12). Always turn off the power to the printer
before you remove labels or label residue that is stuck on the platen
roller!
Darauf achten, dass die Druckwalze nicht von Hand gedreht wird,
wenn die Stromversorgung eingeschaltet ist. Dadurch kann der
Schrittmotorantrieb im Netzteilmodul beschdigt werden (siehe
Kapitel 12). Immer die Stromversorgung des Druckers abschalten,
bevor Etikette oder Etikettrckstnde entfernt werden, die auf der
Druckwalze festkleben!
To replace the platen roller
Note: This procedure also applies to the replacement of the liner drive
roller.
1 Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2 Remove the front/left-hand cover, see Section 3.2.
3 Raise the printhead to open position.
4 Remove the tear-off bar by pulling the plate upwards. Avoid bending
the hooks, which will make it loose-fitting.
5 Press down the snap-lock at the bottom of the guide link and pry the
guide link away from the shafts of the platen roller and the liner drive
roller.
6 Using a 1.5 mm hexagon key, loosen the grub screw in the pulley of the
roller.
7 Hold the pulley and belt while pulling out the roller.
8 Reassemble in reverse order, making sure that the tear bar snaps at the
inner end of the liner drive roller.
When fitting back the pulley, check that the grub screw hits the flat side
of the D-shaped end of the roller shaft. Tighten firmly. Check that the
belts are fitted properly over the pulleys on both the two rollers and the
stepper motor.
78
EasyCoder PF2i
1.5 mm hexagon key
bw
fw
Platen roller
Liner drive roller
Tear bar
Guide link
Snap-lock
EasyCoder PF4i and EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial

1.5 mm hexagon key
bw
fw
Platen roller
Liner drive roller
Tear bar
Guide link
Snap-lock
Illustration shows an EasyCoder PF4i
7.3 Stepper Motor

Description
The stepper motor drives the platen roller and the liner drive roller
using a double-belt pulley and two timing belts inside the electronics
compartment. It also drives the optional liner takeup unit using a pulley
on the opposite side of the motor and a long belt that runs inside a recess
in the center section. The pulleys are permanently fitted and cannot be
replaced.
The stepper motor is driven in micro-stepping mode with 8 steps/dot at 8
dots/mm (203.2 dpi), which means that the theoretical feed error will be
negligible. However, mechanical conditions such as a worn platen roller or
a slippery liner may adversely affect the accuracy.
The stepper motor is fitted using four #T20 Torx screws and rubber noise
dampeners inside a moulding protruding from the center section.
To replace the stepper motor
3 Disconnect the stepper motor cable from P10 on the Power Supply
Unit.
4 Dismantle the stepper motor from the bracket by removing the four
#T20 Torx screws.
5 If the printer has a liner takeup unit (see Chapter 8), remove the media
guide assy (see Section 7.5) to gain access to the belt running from the
stepper motor to the liner takeup unit.
6 Remove the belts from the stepper motor pulleys. If no liner takeup unit
is fitted, you can leave its timing belt in the recess in the center section.
7 Loosen the 1.5 mm hexagonal grub screws that hold the pulleys of the
platen roller and liner drive roller and remove the pulleys and belts.
8 Remove the stepper motor.
9 Replace the rubber dampeners with a fresh set.
10 Put back the stepper motor. If there is an optional liner takeup unit,
start by fitting its belt to the motors inner pulley. If no takeup unit is
fitted, make sure that the pulley does not engage the belt. Then fit the
belt and pulley to the liner drive roller and finally the belt and pulley to
the platen roller.
11 Fit the four screws that hold the flange of the stepper motor.
12 Connect the cable of the stepper motor to P10 on the Power Supply
Unit.
13 Put back all remaining parts.
80
The stepper motor, the dampeners, the belts, and the pulleys are identical
in EasyCoder PF2i,PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial.
Rubber dampeners (4)
Stepper motor
Liner drive roller pulley
Liner drive roller belt

Platen roller pulley
Platen roller belt
7.4 Belts
Description
The print mechanism has two timing belts, one that drives the platen roller
and another that drives the liner drive roller. The belts are subject to wear
and may need periodic replacement.
Replacement
Replace a worn out or broken belt using the same method as when
replacing the stepper motor, see Section 7.3.
Adjustment
The belts cannot be adjusted.
82
7.5 Label Stop Sensor

Description
The label stop sensor (LSS) controls the media feed. It consists of two
identical parts. One is fitted on top of the upper half of the media guide
and the other part is fitted inside the lower half of the media guide
assembly. Both have one light-emitting diode and one photoelectrical
receiver. The upper and lower parts of the LSS can be moved individually
between five fixed positions. It is important that both sensors are set in the
same position or the LSS will not work (except for ticket w mark, which
only uses one LSS part). The sensors are protected from the media by the
two parts of the transparent media guide assembly. The upper part of the
media guide can be lifted or removed to facilitate cleaning.
Diode Sensor
Upper part of LSS
Sensor
Diode
The two parts of the LSS are identical in

all EasyCoder PF-series models.
Lower part of LSS

(hidden under media guide)
Working Principles
Media guide assy.
LSS fitted in an EasyCoder PF4i.
The label stop sensor serves a number of purposes, depending on how

the printer is set up in regard of media type in Fingerprint and IPL
respectively:
Label (w gaps)/Gap
A beam of light is emitted from the diode in the lower part and received
by the sensor in the upper part. The firmware detects the front of each
label, that is, when the light is completely interrupted by the opaque
label, as opposed to the semi-transparent liner in the gaps between labels.
If no label has been detected during a media feed corresponding to more
than 150% of the set label length, a next-label-not-found condition is
assumed. If a renewed print operation gives the same result, an out-ofpaper condition is assumed.
Ticket (w mark)/Mark
Normally, a beam of light is emitted from the diode in the lower part. The
beam is reflected back to the sensor in the lower part by the white media,
or is absorbed by a black mark. The firmware detects when the front edge
of a black mark passes the sensor, that is, when light starts to be absorbed.
If no mark has been detected during a media feed corresponding to more
than 150% of the set ticket length, a next-label-not-found condition is
assumed. If a renewed print operation gives the same result, an out-ofpaper condition is assumed.
By switching the cables from the upper and lower part of the LSS on the
CPU board, black marks on top of the media can be detected.
Ticket (w gaps)/Gap
The light is emitted from the diode in the lower part and received by the
sensor in the upper part. The light will either pass uninterrupted through
a detection gap in the media or be blocked by the non-transparent ticket.
The firmware detects the rear edges of detection gaps, that is, when the
light starts being interrupted. If no ticket has been detected during a media
feed corresponding to more than 150% of the set ticket length, a nextlabel-not-found condition is assumed. If a renewed print operation gives
the same result, an out-of-paper condition is assumed.
Var. Length Strip and Fix Length Strip/Continuous
The light is emitted from the diode in lower part and received by the
sensor in the upper part. The beam will either be blocked by the media
or be completely uninterrupted when the printer runs out of continuous
stock. The firmware assumes an out-of-paper condition if the light has not
been interrupted within a media feed corresponding to 150% of the set
length.
General
The information on where the gaps or marks are presently positioned

relative the LSS (and thereby also relative the dot line on the printhead)
is saved as an invisible file in the flash memorys file operating system
(see Section 12.2). However, if the printhead is raised, or if the power is
84
interrupted during printing, this file may be cleared, which will affect any
labels between the LSS and the dot line. In this case, readjust the LSS by a
TESTFEED operation (Fingerprint) or by pressing the Feed/Pause button
(IPL).
Note (Fingerprint only): It is possible to decide if the media feed data will
be cleared or not when the printhead is raised by means of the Fingerprint
instruction SYSVAR(28). By default, the media feed data are not cleared.
The LSS checks for gaps or marks at every dot of positive media feed (feed
out/print), but gaps or marks are ignored at negative media feed (retract).
Gaps and black marks up to 170 dots (21.3 mm/0.84 inches) are allowed.
Adjustment of the Sensitivity

The LSS should always be adjusted when the user changes to another
brand (sometimes even batch) of media, and when a defective sensor has
been replaced. This is especially the case with self-adhesive labels on liner,
because the transparency of the liner may vary and the difference between
labels and gaps may be too small. Before starting the adjustment, check
that both the upper and lower sensor are clean and free from obstructions
and that the edge guides are adjusted so as to guide the media with a
minimum of play. Also check that both parts of the LSS are in the same
lateral position and aligned with any gaps or black marks.
Fingerprint only
As standard, there are four ways to adjust the LSS:

Performing a TESTFEED by simultaneously pressing the Shift and
Feed keys on the printers built-in keyboard.
Selecting the TESTFEED option in Intermec Shell.
Four values are displayed showing how the sensor has been adjusted.
1. A measured value lower than the displayed value is interpreted as
media detected.
2. A measured value higher than the displayed value is interpreted as no
media detected.
3. Gain, that is, the sensitivity of the sensor.
4. Drive, that is, the intensity of the light-emitting diode.
Selecting the TESTFEED option in the Setup Mode.
Executing a TESTFEED statement in a Fingerprint program.
The printer feeds out 1.5 times the set label length or less while testing
all levels of the LSS at each millimeter of media feed. The LSS is adjusted
according to the result of the check and a full label is fed out according to
the present feedadjust setup.
The label stop sensor/black mark sensor can be turned off for a specified
amount of media feed using the LBLCOND statement, see Intermec
Fingerprint v8.xx Programmers Reference Manual.
IPL only
The sensitivity of the LSS is configured at startup. To force adjustment of

the sensitivity (corresponding to a TESTFEED in Fingerprint), raise and
close the printhead and then press the Feed/Pause key.
Adjustment of the LSS Lateral Position

The LSS can be moved laterally between 5 fixed positions. The two parts of
the LSS must be set individually to the same position. Push them inwards
as far as they go and then pull them outone at the timewhile counting
the clicks from the snap-locks. Use a straight-slot screwdriver or a similar
tool.
In EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial, the lower part of the
LSS may be difficult to adjust laterally. However, there is a hole in the
bottom plate (marked ADJ) through which the LSS can be reached.
The fixed detection points of the sensor in relation to the inner edge of the
media are:
One click out
Two clicks out
Three clicks out
Four clicks out
Five clicks out
3 mm
8 mm
12 mm
16 mm
20 mm
.118 inches
.315 inches
.472 inches
.639 inches
.787 inches
When using irregularly shaped labels, align the LSS with the front tips of
the labels.
86
Cleaning the Media Guide

The upper part of the media guide assembly with the upper LSS can be
tilted upward or removed for occasional cleaning.
Raise the printhead, disengage the semicircular snap-lock from the edge
guide shaft, and tilt up the upper part of the media guide assembly. In
most cases, this gives sufficient access to the LSS windows for cleaning.
Use a cotton swab or similar moistened with isopropyl alcohol to wipe
away adhesive residue, dust, and other substances that may interfere
with the light between the two parts of the LSS.
EasyCoder PF2i
Media guide
(upper part)
LSS windows
Media guide
(lower part)
Snap-lock
Edge guide shaft
Removing the Upper Media Guide

In case of removing pieces of labels stuck to the media guide assembly or
replacement of the upper LSS, you may need to remove the upper part
in order to gain better access. It is fitted to the lower part with a snaplock. Lift up the inner part of the upper media guide and pull it out as
far as the cable allows.
When removing stuck labels, do not use any sharp tools like
screwdrivers, knives, etc., that may scratch the surface. Dissolve the
adhesive with isopropyl alcohol until you can peel away the labels with
your fingers.
Lift and pull out

Cable held by 5 pins
The illustration shows the media guide of an EasyCoder PF4i or

PF4i Compact Industrial.
The same principles apply to the EasyCoder PF2i.
Before fitting back the upper part, check that the cable still is fitted
between the plastic pins and does not prevent the LSS to be moved
between its extreme positions. Insert the upper guide into the snaplock in the lower guide and fold it down so the semicircular snap-lock
engages the edge guide shaft.
88
Replacing the Sensors

To replace the LSS sensors
3 Remove the tear bar and the guide link, see Section 7.2.
4 Thermal transfer models except EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial:
From the electronics compartment, disengage the snap-lock that holds
the cable guard and pull it out along the shaft.
5 Pull out the standard edge guide or the two quick-load guides.
6 Disconnect the cables from connectors J54 and J55 on the front edge of
the CPU board.
7 Remove the three #T20 Torx screws that hold the media guide assembly
and pull it out while carefully manipulating the cable/connector through
the slot in the center section. Be careful not to lose the grounding spring
at the front tip of the assembly.
8 Separate the upper and lower parts of the media guide assy.
9 Push out the sensors while disengaging the snap-locks.
10 Replace the sensors with a new set. Normally, connect the cable from
the lower part (marked BM) to J54 on the CPU board and the one
from the upper part (marked GAP) to J55. The cables can be switched
in order to detect black marks on top instead of the back of the media.
11 Reassemble in reverse order making sure that the grounding spring is
fitted straight up.
EasyCoder PF2i
bw
fw
Grounding spring
Media guide assy.

Cable guard snap-lock
(EasyCoder PF4i only)
bw
Cable guard
(EasyCoder PF4i only)
fw
Grounding spring
Media guide assy.
90
7.6 Printhead
Description
The printing is produced by the thermal printhead, which consists of a
line of very small, closely spaced resistors on a ceramic tile fitted across the
media path. When a current is led through the resistors, commonly called
dots, these will be heated very quickly. When the current is shut off, the
dots cool down just as fast.
As the media is fed past the dots, the hot dots will produce a number
of black spots on heat sensitive (direct thermal) media, or on other face
materials via a thermal transfer ribbon. The spots can be combined into
bitmap patterns, which make up characters, bar codes, images, lines, and
boxes.
The direct thermal printing method requires special media coated with a
thin layer of heat-sensitive chemicals. As the media is fed past the dots, the
heat from the dots will make the chemicals react, producing a dark salt,
which makes up the imprint under each dot.
In the thermal transfer printing method, a special ink-coated transfer
ribbon is used. When the ribbon is heated by a dot on the printhead,
the ink melts and sticks to the receiving face material, where the ink
immediately becomes solid again, producing a black spot. Transfer ribbons
normally do not smear at room temperature, neither before nor after
printing. Nor do the printed labels smear, even if the printout may be
smudged by extensive rubbing if an unfortunate combination of ribbon
and face material is used. The thermal transfer method makes it possible to
use a wide range of face materials for printing, for example papers, boards,
plastics, foils, etc. However, an original transfer ribbon from Intermec
should always be used.
Information on how to switch between direct thermal and thermal transfer
printing is provided in the Users Guide.
The basis for all measures and positioning in both the Intermec Fingerprint
and IPL programming languages is the size of printhead dots.
In an 8 dots/mm (203.2 dpi) printhead, which is standard, each dot has a
nominal size of 0.125 mm (4.92 mils). This means that a heated dot under
standardized conditions will produce a black spot which has a diameter of
0.125 mm (4.92 mils).
In an 11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi) printhead (option for the Fingerprint
versions of EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial only), each dot
has a nominal size of 0.086 mm (3.33 mils).
Depending on dot temperature, exposure time, media and ribbon
characteristics, etc., the spot may actually be somewhat smaller (weak
print) or larger (black print), but that does not affect the calculation of
distances, sizes, and positions.
At startup, the printer auto-detects the printhead density as well as the
head resistance. The printhead can also be checked using the Fingerprint
instructions HEAD, FUNCTEST, and FUNCTEST$. In IPL, the
number and size of the dots in the ptinthead is returned to the host by the
command <STX><ESC>H<ETX>.
EasyCoder PF2i
The 8 dots/mm (203.2 dpi) printhead contains 448 dots, which give a
maximum print width of 56 mm (2.2 inches). The same unit of measure
(dots) can be used both across and along the feed direction.
Specifications
Density
Print width
Number of dots
Dot size
8 dots/mm (203.2 dots per inch)

56 mm (2.2 inches)
448
0.125 mm (4.92 mils)
4 mm (0.16 in.)
Print Width
max. 56 mm (2.2 in.)
Dot-line
on printhead
Dot #0
FEED
DIRECTION
Dot #447
Media Width
25-60 mm (1-2.36 in.)
These two printer have as standard an 8 dots/mm (203.2 dpi) printhead

or as an option an 11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi) printhead (Fingerprint only).
In addition to the normal printheads, which are designed for a media
thickness up to 175 m (7 mils), there are also 8 dots/mm and 11.81
dots/mm printheads for media thicknesses from 170 to 220 m (6.6 to 8.7
mils).
Specifications
Density
Print width
Number of dots
Dot size
8 dots/mm (203.2 dots per inch)

104 mm (4.095 inches)
832
0.125 mm (4.92 mils)
Density
11.81 dots/mm (300 dots per inch)
Print width
105.7 mm (4.161 inches)
Number of dots
1248
Dot size
0.085 mm (3.33 mils)
92
10.3 mm (0.41 in.)
Print Width
max. 104.0 mm (4.095 in.)
Dot-line
on printhead
Dot #0
FEED
DIRECTION
Dot #831
Media Width
25-114.3 mm (1-4.5 in.)
8 dots/mm (203.2 dpi) printhead
8.6 mm (0.34 in.)
Print Width
max. 105.7 mm (4.161 in.)
Dot-line
on printhead
Dot #0
FEED
DIRECTION
Dot #1247
Media Width
25-114.3 mm (1-4.5 in.)
11.81 dots/mm (300 dpi) printhead
The printhead is fitted to a bracket using two screws. The printhead

and the bracket are always delivered as a complete assembly. In case of
EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial, the printhead ribbon break
shaft (see Section 6.8) is also included. Two hooked fingers at the rear of
the bracket are fitted over the headlift shaft so as to hold the printhead
in place. A U-shaped tab on the outer side of the bracket engages the
guide link when the printhead is closed, making sure that the printhead
becomes properly aligned with the platen roller. There are no facilities for
adjusting the position of the printhead relative the platen roller, neither
longitudinally nor laterally.
EasyCoder PF4i has two holes in the outer finger for fitting an optional
spring that secures the printhead when the printer is tilted forward (not
used in EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial).
There are two cables from the printhead to the CPU board:
The innermost cable is used for the power to the printhead and is
connected to P5 at the front of the Power Supply Unit.
The outermost cable is used for data to the printhead and is connected
to J40 on the CPU board.
EasyCoder PF2i
Finger
Cable from power supply unit (P5)
Bracket
Cable from CPU board (J40)
EasyCoder PF4i and

Printhead
Finger
Holes for optional

spring
94
Replacing the Printhead

The printhead is a consumable part subject to wear from both the direct
thermal media or the thermal transfer ribbon and from the rapid heating
and cooling process during printing. Thus, it will require periodic
replacement depending on print volume, type of media or ribbon, amount
of energy to the printhead, print speed, ambient temperature, and several
other factors.
Never use printheads that were designed for the EasyCoder F2, F4
or F4 Compact Industrial. Using one of these printheads will cause a
short circuit or even a blown fuse.
Niemals Druckkpfe benutzen, die fr die Modelle EasyCoder F2,
F4 oder F4 Compact Industrial vorgesehen sind. Wenn einer dieser
Druckkpfe benutzt wird, verursacht dies einen Kurzschluss oder eine
durchgebrannte Sicherung.
To replace a defective or worn printhead
1 Switch off the power.
2 Open the right-hand door.
3 Turn the printhead lift lever clockwise to raise the printhead.
4 Remove any media and ribbon from the print mechanism.
5 Carefully pull the printhead bracket away from the magnet in the
pressure arm.
6 Disconnect the printhead bracket from the print mechanism and pull
out the printhead while twisting it outwards as far as the cables allow.
7 If an EasyCoder PF4i is fitted with an optional securing spring, the
spring must be removed during the printhead replacement operation.
This procedure is generally not described in the manuals, but can be
found in the Installation Instructions that come with the spring.
The illustration shows the printhead of an EasyCoder PF4i.

For illustrated step-by-step instructions, please refer to the Maintenance chapter in the
Users Guide.
8 Disconnect the two cables from the printhead. Note the snap-lock on
the inner connector. Pull at the connectors, not at the cables!
9 Connect the two cables to the replacement printhead.
10 Put back the printhead in reverse order and check that the printhead
cables run freely.
11 Lower the printhead so the magnet engages the printhead bracket.
12 Switch on the power. The printers firmware automatically measures the
printhead resistance and density at startup.
13 Load the media (and ribbon) again.
Precautions
Some simple measures can be taken by the user to prevent premature wearout:
Clean the printhead regularly, as described in the Users Guide. Not only
will a dirty printhead produce an inferior printout, but any residue on
the dots will prevent heat to dissipate through the media.
Follow the Intermecs recommendations regarding Paper Type or Media
Sensitivity setup. Too much energy to the printhead will wear it out
rapidly.
Do not use higher Print Speed setting than necessary.
Low ambient temperature requires more energy to the printhead
dots than room temperatures and will therefore cause more wear to
the printhead. High print speed accelerates the wear. Thus, at low
temperatures, select as low a print speed as acceptable.
In Fingerprint, do not use a higher Contrast setting than necessary,
especially not in combination with the highest Label Constant or
Ribbon Constant settings.
In IPL, do not use a higher Darkness setting than necessary.
Do not use a higher printhead pressure than necessary.
Never print outside the media path. Dots that are not in contact with
the media will not be cooled properly.
When using media with less than full width, be careful to adjust the
printhead lift arm so there is an even pressure across the media. Not
only will an uneven pressure impair the printout quality, but it may also
prevent the dots from being properly cooled. Moreover, a sharp outer
media edge in direct contact with the printhead may cause excessive
mechanical wear on some dots, which may be visible when printing on
wider media later.
When using preprinted labels or labels with some type of varnish or
non-standard top coating for direct thermal printing, use original
Intermec labels or inks recommended by leading manufacturers of direct
thermal media. The labels must not contain any aggressive substances
such as chloride or grinding substances such as titanium dioxide.
Only use transfer ribbons recommended by Intermec.
96
7.7 Headlift Sensor

Description
The purpose of the headlift sensor is to detect whether the printhead is
raised or lowered. To avoid the risk of overheating the printhead dots,
printing cannot be performed when the sensor detects that the printhead
is raised (the media serves to cool the printhead). An ever so slightly raised
printhead would also impair the printout quality. Thus, it is important that
the printhead is properly engaged and a sufficient pressure is applied before
the sensor detects a Closed condition.
The sensor is fitted using a barbed shaft that is pressed into a hole in
the center section. The sensor consists of a light-emitting diode and
a photoelectric sensor with housing and cables. The headlift sensor is
connected to J58 (marked HEADLIFT) on the CPU board.
A beam of light is constantly transmitted from the diode. When the
printhead is in closed position, the light beam is interrupted by an angular
plate at the end of the crank shaft. As soon as the headlift lever is activated,
and even before the printhead starts to raise, the plate is moved out of
the sensor gap and the sensor can detect the light beam. This condition
is managed by the firmware. In Fingerprint, an error message (1022
Head Lifted) will be returned if you try to print a label. In IPL, the error
message Print Head UP/Press Feed is displayed.
Plate on crank shaft
(printhead lowered)
J84
Headlift sensor
J58
HEADLIFT
Connect here!
To improve visibility, no transfer ribbon mechanism is shown.
Sensor Replacement
Before deciding to replace the sensor, check that the sensor is free from
dust, and other objects that can block the light.
To replace the sensor
1 Switch off the power, remove the power cord, and remove the front/
left-hand cover.
2 Raise the printhead.
3 Disconnect the sensors cable from the CPU board.
4 Pull the sensor straight out using a pair of pliers. The sensor has a barbed
shaft inserted into a hole in the center section moulding and requires
some force to come out.
5 Make sure the hole is clear from any remnants of the old sensor.
6 Reassemble in reverse order. The sensors cable should be connected to
J58 (marked HEADLIFT) on the CPU board.
7 In Fingerprint, check that the sensor works properly using a PRSTAT
statement, see Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx, Programmers Reference
Manual.
8 In IPL, check that the sensor works properly using the Label Path Open
Sensor Value (<STX><ESC>T;L;R<ETX>), see IPL Programming,
Reference Manual.
98
7.8 Headlift Mechanism

Description
The headlift mechanism is used to raise and lower the printhead to allow
media and ribbon load and also to apply a proper printhead pressure
against the media. It works the same way in EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and
PF4i Compact Industrial even if some parts in the media compartment
differ. See Section 7.1 and the next page for illustrations!
The headlift is operated by the green headlift lever in the print mechanism.
The lever is snap-locked at the end of the crank shaft, which runs inside
the pressure shaft. At the other end of the crank shaft and inside the
electronics compartment is an angular plate, which is used by the headlift
sensor to detect whether the printhead is lowered or raised (see Section
7.7).
A small eccentrically fitted knob on the angular plate runs in a crescentshaped slot in the lifting arm. A coil spring presses the knob down in the
slot and helps lifting the printhead. The lifting arm is connected by a link
to the pressure link, which pivots in extensions from the center section.
Thereby the rotating movement of the crankshaft is transformed into a
lateral movement.
The upper part of the pressure link is spring-loaded in relation to the
center section. Thus, when the lever is turned towards lowered printhead
position, the pressure is increased. The pressure is factory-adjusted by
means of two screws inside the electronics compartment and fine-adjusted
by the operator using a straight-slot screw accessible through a hole in the
center section.
The lifting arm is connected to the pressure shaft by a lever. The pressure
shaft runs through the center section to the print mechanism, where the
pressure arm is fitted on the shaft. A magnet at the tip of the pressure arm
holds the printhead bracket. The arm can be moved laterally to apply its
pressure at the center of the media, regardless of media width.
The printhead bracket hangs loosely on the pressure shaft in two hooked
fingers. When the printhead is lowered, semicircular guides at both sides
of the bracket engage the inner part of the platen roller and a slot in the
guide link, ensuring that the printhead will be properly aligned with the
platen roller.
When the printhead lift lever is activated from lowered position, the
printhead will not start to move immediately, but the angular plate on
the crank shaft will start to rotate out of the gap in the headlift sensor,
indicating a printhead lifted condition. When the lever has reached
a more or less vertical position, a clicking noise will be heard and the
printhead is raised from the platen roller. Now the coil spring between
the angular plate and the lifting arm will help the operator finish the
movement of the lever and hold the printhead firmly in raised position.
When the printhead lift lever is turned from raised to lowered position,
the operator has to overcome a slight pressure from the coil spring until
the lever passes a vertical position. Then the printhead snaps into place and
the spiral spring applies its pressure. In the final part of the movement,
the angular plate is rotated into the gap of the headlift sensor indicating a
printhead closed condition.
This exploded view shows the parts of the headlift mechanism. Also refer
to illustrations in Section 7.1 for assembled views.
Fine-adjustment screw
C
Printhead lift lever
Pressure spring
Pressure arm
Shoe
Nut
Pressure shaft
#T10 Torx screws
Printhead
with
bracket
Pressure
link
Lever
Crank shaft
Angular plate
Lifting arm
Link
Coil spring
100
The illustration shows an EasyCoder PF4i. All parts of the headlift

mechanism on the electronic compartment side of the center section and
the fine-adjustment screw are the same in all EasyCoder PF2/4i-series
printers. The transfer ribbon mechanism have been omitted to improve
visibility.
Printhead Pressure Adjustment

A skilled service technician can use the procedure described below to adjust
printhead pressure. Operators should only use the fine-adjustment screw
accessible from the media compartment.
1 Slit a piece of plastic tube lengthwise and put it on the tear bar in order
to minimize the friction. The tube must not interfere with the printhead
ribbon break shaft.
2 Fit a 300 g (0.66 lb) weight at the end of a full width strip of liner.
3 Loosen the upper #T10 Torx screw (A).
4 Using a 5.5 mm spanner, loosen the nut on screw (B).
5 Loosen the lower #T10 Torx screw (B) in the electronics compartment
until the nut almost comes off.
6 Tighten the fine-adjustment screw (C) until it comes as far into the shoe
as possible and the spiral spring becomes compressed.
7 Lower the printhead.
8 Tighten screw B until it meets the end of the fine-adjustment screw (C).
9 Raise the printhead and put the liner strip between the printhead and
platen roller so the weight hangs freely over the tear bar. Lower the
printhead.
10 Loosen screw B until the strip starts to slip and tighten it again until the
strip stops to slip.
11 Tighten screw B two (2) full turns and lock it with the nut. Now the
printhead has a pressure of approximately 4.2 kgs.
12 Loosen screw C six full turns (PF2i) or four full turns (PF4i and PF4i
Compact Industrial) to decrease the pressure (each turn represents
approximately 0.5 kp of pressure).
Do not use a higher printhead pressure than necessary. High
printhead pressure increases the wear on the printhead and shortens
its life.
Keinen hheren Druckkopfdruck benutzen als erforderlich. Ein
hoher Druckkopfdruck bedeutet mehr Druckkopfverschlei und
eine krzere Lebensdauer des Druckkopfs.
13 Tighten screw A until it has a play of 0.1 mm (4 mils) to the lifting
link and lock it with blue Loctite. The tightness of this screw affects the
resistance in the printhead lift lever.
14 Fine-adjust using screw C according to test labels. Differences in
media thickness, stiffness, width, etc. may require slightly higher or
lower pressure. Generally, thicker and/or stiffer media requires more
printhead pressure. However, a very high pressure setting on screw
C may require readjustment of screw A or there will be no printhead
pressure at all.
15 If necessary, lubricate moving parts with MolyKote P6 30 L Plastislip or
a similar grease.
Printhead Pressure Alignment Adjust

The printer is factory-adjusted for full media width. When using media
less than full width, it is recommended to adjust the pressure arm so it
becomes centered in relation to the media. Thereby, an even pressure across
the media is obtained.
A poorly adjusted pressure arm may be detected by a weaker printout on
the inner part of a less than full width media. Similarly, when reverting to a
wider media, the arm should be adjusted, or the printout on the outer part
of the media could be weak.
To adjust the pressure arm, proceed as follows:
Loosen the straight-slot screw that holds the pressure arm. Move the
arm inwards or outwards until the arrow on the tip of the arm becomes
centered in relation to the media.
Note: While moving the arm, push at the part where the screw is situated,
not at the tip. If the arm is hard to move, raise the printhead and pull the
printhead bracket free from the magnet in the pressure arm.
After having centered the arm, lock it by tightening the screw.
Adjust all edge guides.
Straight-slot screw
Center of media
Tip of pressure arm
The illustration shows a dedicated direct thermal EasyCoder PF4i printer.

102
7.9 Media Feed Principles

Fingerprint only
The Start and Stop Adjust parameters in the Fingerprint Setup Mode
control how the media will be positioned in relation to the printhead when
the printing starts and after the printing is completed, respectively. By
default, the Start and Stop Adjust parameters are both set to 0, which is
suitable for tearing off the media against the tear bar, for example between
labels or at the perforation in a pre-perforated continuous stock. However,
because the dot line on the printhead is situated 14.4 mm (0.57 inches)
back from the tear bar, the printing will not start at the top of the label but
further back along the media path.
14.4 mm
Default (tear-off)
Start Adjust: 0
Stop Adjust: 0
Dot Line on Printhead
Tear Bar
Label Stop
Sensor
Note: Due to several factors, media feed measurements are not exact and
may vary somewhat between applications and individual printers. There
is inevitably a small amount of slippage between media and platen roller,
which in its turn is affected by printhead pressure, type of media or liner,
thickness of the media, roll size, type of media supply device, etc. The
platen roller may be worn, giving it a slightly smaller diameter and/or less
friction. There is also a certain amount of inexactness in the media feed
mechanics and belts and so on. Therefore, the operator cannot expect to
reach exact Start and Stop Adjust values simply by calculation. Use the
measurements given in this chapter to calculate rough starting points and
use the trial-and-error method to find values that give the desired result.
Note: All calculations and feed adjust values in this Section (7.9) refer to 8
dots/mm (202.3 dpi) printheads.
In many cases, it is desired to start the printing immediately at the top

of the label. Actually, what you want to do is to pull back the edge of the
media to the dot line. You can do this by means of a negative Start Adjust
value (for example -100 dots = 12.5 mm/0.49 inches). Be careful not to
enter too large a value, or the media may come loose from platen roller.
14.4 mm
Tear off (print at top of label):

Start Adjust: -100
Stop Adjust: 0
Tear Bar
Label Stop
Sensor
When using peel-off operation, the labels would drop from the liner and
get stuck on for example the desk if you use the default Start Adjust value
0. Use a Stop Adjust value of around -44 (= 5.5 mm/0.22 inches) instead:
that is, after the printing is completed 5.5 mm/0.22 inches less of media
feed than normal will be performed. However, if you still want to print
from the top of the label, you must compensate by a Start Adjust value
of around -56 (= 7.0 mm/0.28 inches). Note that the sum of the Start
and Stop Adjust values always is 100 dots (12.5 mm/0.49 inches), which
corresponds to the distance between dot line and tear bar minus a margin
for the gap between labels and certain slippage.
14.4 mm
Peel off (print at top of label):

Start Adjust: -56
Stop Adjust: -44
Tear Bar
Label Stop
Sensor
A special case is tickets with black marks. It is recommended to place the

black mark adjacent to the perforation or the intended tear-off line. If the
black mark is placed further down the media, this must be compensated
for by a negative Stop Adjust setting.
104
IPL only
In IPL, the media feed is affected by the mode of operation. There are
three such modes:
Tear-off (straight-through)
(default)
Peel-off (self-strip)
(enabled/disabled by <STX><SI>tn<ETX> command)
Cut-off
(activated/deactivated when the cutter is enabled/dispabled in the Setup
Mode or by <STX><SI>cn<ETX> command)
Each mode has a fixed amount of media feed, which can be fine-adjusted
using the Label Rest Point parameter in the Setup Mode (See Appendix A,
Setup/Media/Lbl Rest Point) or an <STX><SI>fn<ETX> command.
The type of detection is decided by the Media Type parameter in the Setup
Mode (See Appendix A, Setup/Media/Media Type).
106
Liner Takeup Unit
This chapter descibes the optional liner takeup unit and covers the
following topics:
Description
Takeup unit parts
Fitting a liner takeup unit
Replacing the timing belt
Chapter 8Liner Takeup Unit
8.1 Description
The liner takeup unit is a factory installed option that is used for peeloff (self-strip) operation. Peel-off means that self-adhesive labels are
automatically separated from the liner (backing paper) after printing and
the liner is wound up on a hub inside the printers media compartment.
Peel-off operation cannot be combined with Quick-Load guides. The
rewind unit is made up by the following main parts:
The takeup hub assy (see Section 8.2 for details)
The timing belt (fitted in all printers)
The guide shaft
Center section
Stepper motor
Belt
Pulley
Shaft
Pulley
Spring clutch
Guide shaft
Takeup hub
(EasyCoder PF4i and
EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial)
Takeup hub
(EasyCoder PF2i)
108
The takeup hub is driven by a pulley on the right side of the stepper motor
via a timing belt, which runs in a recess in the center section behind the
media guide assy. (To simplify manufacturing, the timing belt is fitted in
all printers, but when there is no takeup unit it does not engage the pulley
of the stepper motor). The dimensions of the pulleys make the takeup hub
rotate somewhat faster than the media is being fed out, thus providing a
certain tension to the liner. A wrapped spring clutch inside the takeup hub
allows it to slip so as to limit the tension. An extra guide shaft fitted to the
center section separates the liner from the media path.
The liner drive roller (standard) underneath the platen roller helps pulling
the liner (see Section 7.1).
The tension of the timing belt cannot be adjusted.
8.2 Takeup Unit Parts

The liner takeup unit consists of the following parts:
Timing belt pulley (with flange and bearing)
Hub (with spring clutch, bearing, and brace)
Shaft
The differece between EasyCoder PF2i and PF4i/PF4i Compact Industrial
is that in EasyCoder PF2i the hub is shorter and the brace does not have a
return spring but must be operated manually both ways.
EasyCoder PF2i
Return spring
Shaft
EasyCoder PF4i and

Bearing
Brace
Hub
Spring clutch
Pulley
Bearing
The threaded shaft is screwed into the center section. The timing belt
pulley is fitted on the shaft and the timing belt is fitted around the pulley.
The spring brake is mounted inside the bobbin and fits around the outer
end of the pulley. It provides the necessary friction to keep the liner tight
without pulling it too hard.
The brace collapses when being pulled out. The plastic spring inside the
brace returns and expands the brace when it is released (EasyCoder PF4i
and PF4i Compact Industrial only). Thus, the wound up liner can easily be
removed at media replenishment.
The bobbin is held on the shaft by a snap-lock of the same type as the
ribbon supply and rewind hubs (see Sections 6.2 and 6.3).
When no rewind unit is fitted, the recess in the center section is covered
by a circular cover plate, which can be removed using a #T20 Torx
screwdriver.
110
8.3 Fitting a Liner Takeup Unit

Even if the liner takeup unit is intended to be factory-fitted, it is quite easy
to upgrade a printer with such a device.
To install a liner takeup unit
1 Remove the cover plate from the center section using a #T20 Torx
screwdriver.
2 Pull out the rear part of the timing belt from inside the media guide
assy.
3 Fit the takeup pulley into the recess in the center section and wrap the
timing belt around it. When you pull the timing belt, it will engage the
pulley of the stepper motor.
4 Screw the takeup shaft through the rewind pulley and into the center
section using a pair of pliers. Then screw the takeup guide shaft into
the center section. Use tape or similar to protect the shafts from being
scratched by the tool.
5 While rotating it, press the takeup hub onto the shaft and the pulley.
Press until the snap-lock engages the groove in the shaft.
8.4 Replacing the Timing Belt

To replace a broken or worn-out timing belt
1 Remove the media guide assy. as described in Section 7.5, Label Stop
Sensor/Replacing the Sensors.
2 Pull out the rewind bobbin from the shaft. You will need two straightslot screwdrivers or a special tool to pry the two legs of the snap-lock out
of the groove in the shaft.
3 Separate the pulley from the takeup hub while taking care so the spring
clutch stays inside the hub.
4 Fit a new timing belt over the pulley of the stepper motor.
5 Put back the takeup pulley and rewind hub as described in Section 8.3.
6 Reassemble remaining parts in reverse order.
112
Label Taken Sensor
This chapter describes the optiona label taken sensor and applies to all
EasyCoder PF-series printers and covers the following topics:
Description
Replacement
Activating the LTS
Adjustment
Chapter 9Label Taken Sensor
9.1 Description
The Label Taken Sensor (LTS) is a factory-installed or field-installable
optional device, which enables the printers firmware to detect if the latest
printed label, ticket, tag, etc. has been removed before printing another
copy. It cannot be used in conjuction with a paper cutter, see Chapter 10.
The label taken sensor consists of a photoelectric sensor with a bracket and
a connection cable. The sensor and bracket are fitted to a lug at the front
tip of the center section using a #T10 Torx screw.
Mounting lug
Center section
Cable to J53 on the CPU board
Sensor
Bracket
#T10 Torx screw
A LED (light-emitting diode) in the LTS emits a narrow beam of light,

which will be reflected back to a photoelectric sensor by any label, ticket,
tag, piece of strip, or liner, that has not been removed from the outfeed
area. A prerequisite is that the media is fed out along the center section of
the printer.
The LTS is connected to J53 on the CPU board. The sensitivity is adjusted
in the Setup Mode, see Section 9.3.
The theoretical point of detection of the LTS is situated 20.7 mm (0.81in.)
outside the inner edge of the media path and immediately in front of the
tear bar.
114
9.2 Replacement
The LTS kit consists of a sensor with cable, a screw, and bracket.
To replace a faulty LTS
2 Remove the bottom plate/right-hand door assembly, which is held to the
center section and power supply unit by a total of six #T20 Torx screws,
see Section 4.1.
Removing the bottom plate exposes the power supply, which
contains wires and circuits with high voltage. For safety reasons,
the power cord must be disconnected before the bottom plate is
removed!
3 Disconnect the LTS cable from the CPU board. (It is not necessary to
remove the front/left-hand cover.)
4 Remove the #T10 Torx screw that holds the bracket and sensor.
5 Peel out the cable from the grooves in the center section, taking note
how the cable runs.
6 Fit a new LTS assembly in reverse order.
7 Start up the printer, enter the Setup Mode and adjust the sensitivity of
the new LTS as described in Section 9.3.
9.3 Activating the LTS

In Fingerprint, the label taken sensor is enabled using the instruction
LTS& ON.
In IPL, the self-strip mode must be enbled. This can also be done by
executing the following commands:
<STX>R<ETX>
(Enter print/configuration mode)
<STX><SI>t1<ETX>
(Enable self-strip)
9.4 Adjustment
The sensitivity of the Label Taken Sensor (LTS) may need to be adjusted
according to the ambient light conditions and the reflective characteristics
of the back side of the media.
Fingerprint
The sensitivity can be adjusted in the Setup Mode (see Appendix 1),
or by using setup files or setup strings (see Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx,
Programmers Reference Manual). In the Setup Mode, the LTS setup options
are only displayed if an optional label taken sensor is installed in the
printer.
LTS Adjust:
Press <Enter>. A label is fed out. Remove the label and press <Enter>
again. A menu shows the sensitivity automatically selected by the
firmware and the range in which the LTS will work. Press <Enter> again
and you will proceed to the LTS Test menu.
LTS Test:
Press <Enter>. A label is fed out. Remove the label and a new label
should be fed out automatically. Repeat until you are sure the LTS
works properly. Then press <Enter> to stop and exit.
LTS Value:
Press <Enter>. You can enter a new value in the range indicated in the
LTS Adjust menu (see above). Min/max values are in the range 0-10.
IPL
The sensitivity can be adjusted in the Setup mode (see Appendix 1).
To adjust sensitivity in Setup mode
1 In the Setup Mode, select the Configuration option.
2 Select LTS Calibration and press the key.
3 Press <Enter>
4 A number of labels are fed out. Remove the labels and press <Enter>.
5 The sensor has now been automatically adjusted and the resulting
sensitivity is displayed as a numeric value in the range of 8 to 14.
116
10
Paper Cutter
This chapter descibes the optional paper cutter for EasyCoder PF4i and
PF4i Compact Industrial. There is no cutter available for EasyCoder PF2i.
The chapter covers the following topics:
Description
Installation
Controlling the cutter
Media load
Servicing
Cutter PCB
Intermec EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial Printers Service Manual 117
Chapter 10Paper Cutter
10.1 Description
The cutter is a factory-installed or field-installable option for the
EasyCoder PF4i and PF4i Compact Industrial. It does not fit the
EasyCoder PF2i. The cutter automatically cuts off the media after printing
according to instructions in the controlling firmware. The cut off portions
of media are presented at the front of the cutter and can be collected on a
removeable tray.
The cutter can be tilted forward to facilitate media load. As a safety
measure, the cutter can only operate when being completely closed.
The cutter prevents an optional label taken sensor from working, even if it
not necessary to remove it before fitting the cutter.
Cutter
Print button
Removable tray
Outfeed slot
The cutter is primarily intended to cut paper-based media in the form

of continuous stock. It is also possible to cut through the liner between
labels, but be careful not to cut through the labels themselves, because the
adhesive will stick to the cutting blade and may cause malfunction.
Avoid cutting soft plastic-based media.
Minimum media thickness: 78m
Maximum media thickness: 175m
For measures, refer to Sections 1.6 and 1.7.
The weight of the cutter is 1.16 kg (2.56 lb).
118
10.2 Installation
The cutter is easy to install and requires no modification of the printer
itself.
The installation kit contains:

Cutter unit (1)

Tray (1)
Cable (1)
Cable cover (1)
#T20 Torx screws and washers (3)
Installation Instructions (1)
The only tool required is a #T20 Torx screwdriver.

To install the cutter
1 Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord and any interface
cables.
2 Remove the front/left side moulding that covers the electronics
compartment as described in Section 3.2.
The electronics compartment contains wires and components
with dangerous voltage (up to 380V). Always switch off the power
and unplug the power cord before you remove the cover over the
electronics compartment!
3 If you have an EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial, also remove the
front door, see Section 3.3.
4 Close the right-hand door and turn the printer upside-down.
5 Insert the cutter bracket between the printers bottom plate and print
mechanism so the three threaded bushings on the bracket fits into the
corresponding holes in the printers bottom plate. Use the three #T20
Torx screws and washers included in the kit.
6 Route the cutter cable through the slot in the bottom plate as illustrated
on the next page and connect it firmly to J51 at the lower front corner
of the CPU board (marked FINISHER).
7 Pull the cable forward towards the cutter so the slack comes between
printer and cutter. Lock it in place using the cable cover and the
existing #T20 Torx screw as illustrated above.
8 Check that the cutter cable still is properly connected to the CPU
board.
9 Swing the clip aside and connect the cable to the connector on the
cutter. Secure the cable with the clip.
10 Put the printer back on its feet.

11 Put back the front/left side cover.
12 Connect the power cord and any communication cables. Check that the
cutter is closed and switch on the power.

Bracket
Existing #T20 Torx screw
#T20 Torx screws

and washers (3)
Clip
Cable Cover
Cable
Connect to J51 on CPU

board
Fitting a cutter on an EasyCoder PF4i
120
10.3 Controlling the Cutter

Fingerprint
The cutter is activated by CUT or CUT ON statements, see the Intermec

Fingerprint v8.xx,or the Intermec Direct Protocol v8.xx manuals. Application
programs may have related facilities for operating the cutter.
The edge will cut through the media approx. 33 mm (1.3 inches) in front
of the printers dot line. The following values are recommended for cutting:
Type of Cutting 8 dots/mm printhead
11.81 dots/mm printhead
Cut between labels
Start adjust:
0 dots
0 dots
Stop adjust:
+ 160 dots
+236 dots
Cut between labels and print from leading edge on next label
Start adjust:
- 250 dots
-369 dots
Stop adjust:
+ 160 dots
+236 dots
Cut variable length strip (no liner!)
Start adjust:
- 250 dots
-369 dots
Stop adjust:
+ 275 dots
+406 dots
IPL
The cutter can be enabled/disabled in the Configuration part of the setup

mode or using the command <STX><SI>cn<ETX>
, where n= 0
disables the cutter and n=1 enables it. When the cutter is enabled, the
media feed is automatically adjusted for cut-off operation.
When the cutter is not enabled, a cut operation (advance label and cut)
can be executed using the command <STX><SO><ETX> .
Also see IPL Programming, Reference Manual.
10.4 Media Load

Load media following the descriptions in the Users Guide for Media Load/
Cut-Off operation (optionally with Quick-Load guides). The cutter is held
by a snap lock and can be tilted forward to facilitate media load. Always
engage the printhead in order to hold the media before closing the cutter.
10.5 Servicing the Cutter

Remove the cutter cover to expose the cutter mechanism and the circuit
board. The cover is held by three #T20 Torx screws. It is not necessary to
remove the entire cutter unit.
The cutter shears will need to be cleaned from adhesive residue if the cutter
has been used for cutting through labels, something that is not advisible.
Use isopropyl alcohol (see warning text on the container). The extreme
positions of the moving cutting shear (that is, the shear is in top or home/
bottom position) is detected by a sensor at the tip of the circuit board and
a microswitch at the right side of the cutter assy. If the following errors
occur, clean the shears from adhesive residue and the sensor from dust.
Fingerprint only
If the following errors occur, clean the shears from adhesive residue and the
sensor from dust.
1701 Cutter error1
A cut has been performed but the shear has stopped on its way back to
home (bottom) position.
1702 Cutter error2
The cutter has failed to cut after several attempt (3 is default) and the
shear has returned to home (bottom) position.
1703 Cutter error3
The cutter has failed to cut and the shear has stopped before returning
to home (bottom) position.
If the cutter cable connector has come loose from Finisher interface, Error
37, Cutter device not found or Error 1059, Cutter does not respond will
occur.
If the cutter open/closed microswitch on the cutter assy is faulty, Error
1704, Cutter open will occur, even if the cutter in fact is closed.
IPL only
IPL reports if the cutter has failed to return to home position by displaying
the message Open&shut cutter. Follow that instruction. If the error
persists, clean the shears from adhesive residue and the sensor from dust.
122
Lubricated Parts
No isolpropyl alcohol here!
Circuit board
Bracket
Star washer (4)

#T10 Torx
screw (3)
#T10 Torx screw

Cable
Top position sensor
Print button
#T20 Torx screw (x2)
Bracket
Spring (2)
Grip
Cutter bottom
(home) position
microswitch
Cover
#T20 Torx screw
Cutter open/closed microswitch
Tray
10.6 Cutter PCB

1-971618-27 Cutter Circuit Board; Components
Component Side
Soldering Side
124
1-971618-27 Cutter Circuit Board; Schematics
VCC
3
PH1
4
C9
R14
VCC
R20
VCC
R3
VCC
VCC
P24
VCC
GND
GND
R4
CUTO1
CUTI3
CUTI1
CUTI2
1
C3
VCC
SDA
GND
SCL
R23
R10
IC1
R5
R24
4
13
12
10
9
2
3
R6
GND
VDD
VSS
RB3/MCLR/VPP
RB0
RB1
RC5
RC2
RC3
RC4
RB2
RC0
RC1
R16
C13
14
8 SENS_HOME
7 SENS_OPEN
6 MOEN1
11 PHASE
GND
GND
R18
VCC
X1
C6
R17
C7
10
11
9
VCC
GND
8
13
2
12
R11
C10
C8
C2
R19
R8
R12
VCC
VR
T
C
E
C16
GND
MA
MB
VM1
VM2
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
GND5
GND6
GND7
GND8
19
GND
P24
R22 ONLY MOUNTED IF Q1 NOT MOUNTED
3
18
C4
4
5
6
7
14
15
16
17
R21
R22
Q1
Z1
C5
R13
VCC
PHASE
I0
I1
C15
C14
IC2
R2
GND
C1
P2
RB5/OSC1/CLKIN
RB4/OSC2/CLKOUT
R7
R1
1
2
3
4
5
6
5 SENS_UP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R15
C12
GND
VCC
P1
R9
GND
SW1
GND
GND
GND
GND
126
11
Electronics Compartment
This chapter describes how to access the electronics compartment and

shows the main parts.
The electronics compartment contains wires and components with
compartment!
Chapter 11Electronics Compartment
11.1 Introduction
Normal users are not allowed in the electronics compartment, but for
the authorized service technician, it contains a number of parts of great
interest:
The stepper motor and timing belts of the platen and liner drive rollers.
The ribbon feed motor.
The headlift mechanism and sensor.
The CPU board.
The power supply unit.
Optionally one extra interface board and/or one EasyLAN board.
11.2 Accessing the Electronics Compartment

To gain access to the electronics compartment, remove the front/left-hand
cover as described in Section 3.2. To completely remove the cover, you
will need to disconnect the cable to the console pcb from J50 on the CPU
board.
Power Supply
High voltage!
#T20 Torx
screws
(x3)
The illustration shows an EasyCoder PF4i, but the same principles apply to all EasyCoder PF-series printers.
128
11.3 Main Parts

This is what you may see when you remove the front/left-hand cover
from an EasyCoder PF4i or PF4i Compact Industrial printer. The
EasyCoder PF2i looks the same with the exception that the transfer ribbon
mechanism is optional.
Power supply
(behind CPU board)
Optional EasyLAN board
Connect console pcb here
Headlift
mechanism
Ribbon
motor
Optional
interface board
CPU board
Stepper motor
Platen roller
belt and pulley
Liner drive roller

belt and pulley
130
12
Power Supply
This chapter describes the power supply unit (PSU) which is fitted in the
electronics compartment, see Chapter 11.
compartment!
Double Pole/Neutral Fusing. Parts may remain live after fuse
operation.
Zweipolige/Neutralsicherung. Teile knnen nach Ansprechen der
Sicherung noch stromfhrend sein.
Description
Replacement
Components
Schematics
Chapter 12Power Supply
12.1 Description
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) is identical in all EasyCoder PF2/4i- and
PM4i-series printers. It is situated inside the electronics compartment
between the CPU board and the center section.
No attempt to repair this unit is allowed. Never replace a blown fuse, but
replace the entire PSU.
The power supply unit is primary-switched with power correction factor
controller so as to comply with the CE regulations, which require a sinusshaped load curve. It is designed for input voltages in the range of 90 to
265 VAC, 45 to 65Hz. There is no manual switch.
The unit requires 15W at standby and 300W peak. It produces 24VDC
only; all other voltages are transformed from 24VDC by the CPU
board. The CPU board controls the PSU over the I2C bus, where also
identification and error signals are transmitted to the CPU board. Voltage
and temperature are monitored and the unit is over-current protected.
The PSU consists of the following main parts:
Power Supply Board

15W standby
(approx. 300W peak)
Input Voltage:
90 to 265 VAC
45 to 65Hz
Stepper Motor
Controller
Stepper Motor
Output
24 VDC 6A
P24 Enable
Power Fail
Input
Booster
Converter
Forward
Converter
Pulse Width
Modulator
Pulse Width
Modulator
Forward
(w. Power Factor Contr.)
Rectifier 24V
Stepper Motor
Controller
Temperature Control
&
Power Fail Interrupt
I2C-bus
132
Control Vout
(24V)
Power Factor Control

The power factor control transforms the AC input voltage to 385 VDC
by sensing the shape of the curve of the input voltage and chopping it to
short pulses, where the pulse amplitude follows the shape of the curve. The
booster is protected by two 4A fuses.
Forward Converter
The forward converter transforms 385 VDC to 24 VDC 0-6A. The
24VDC is the bulk voltage and is used for all parts of the printer. Other
voltages needed for internal devices are locally transformed from 24VDC.
Connections
P1 24VDC to CPU board, control lines, and I2C bus communication

between PSU and CPU board.
P5 24VDC to printhead
P6 Ribbon motor
P7 Not used
P8 ISR connector (not used)
P10 Stepper motor
X1 Input voltage 90 to 265VAC, 45 to 65Hz
Overheating Protection
The power supply unit is fitted with a sensor that will shut down the
unit in case of overheating (Power Fail Interrupt or PFI) and another
sensor that will warn the main CPU if the power supply is getting hot
(Notify). A Power Fail Interrupt (PFI) signal will warn the logics so
valuable data can be saved before power is lost. Before a print operation is
executed, the Notify signal is checked. If the Notify signal is activated, a
warning is shown in the display and the main CPU will reduce the power
consumption to avoid shutdown by detaining the printing until the Notify
signal is deactivated.
The power supply unit contains wires and circuits with dangerous
voltages. For safety reasons, it is strictly forbidden to try to repair a
power supply unit or to replace a blown fuse. Whenever a fuse blows,
always replace the entire power supply unit.
Das Netzteilmodul enthlt Kabel und Schaltkreise, die gefhrliche
Spannungen fhren. Aus Sicherheitsgrnden ist es streng untersagt,
ein Netzteilmodul zu reparieren oder eine durchgebrannte Sicherung
auszutauschen. Falls eine Sicherung durchbrennt, muss das gesamte
Netzteilmodul ausgetauscht werden.
12.2 Replacing the Power Supply Unit

The PSU comes as a complete unit consisting of a large metal bracket to
which the following parts are factory-fitted:
Plastic protection sheet
Power supply pcb (attached to the bracket using four #T10 Torx screws
and washers)
AC power cord socket (attached to the bracket using two #T10 Torx
screws and nuts)
On/off switch (attached to the bracket using snap-locks)
Label
The bracket is fitted to the center section using four #T20 Torx screws and
to the bottom plate using two #T20 Torx screws.
Bracket
Label
Protection Sheet
On/Off switch
Power cord
socket
#T10 Torx
screws
and nuts
(x2)
PSU board
#T10 Torx screws and washers (x4)
Power supply unit (simplified drawing)
134
Replacement Procedure
Take precautions to avoid any electrostatic discharges, for instance by
wearing grounded wrist straps.
1 Switch off the printer and disconnect the power cord and all interface
cables on the rear plate.
2 Remove the front/left-hand cover as described in Section 3.2.
3 Remove any interface bord connected or attached to the CPU board.
4 Disconnect all cables from the CPU board and remove it (see Section
13.3). The CPU board is held to the PSU bracket using four #T20
screws and one hexagonal spacer.
5 Remove the six #T20 Torx screws that hold the PSU bracket to the
center section and to the bottom plate.
6 Do not dismantle the PSU. Replace the entire unit!
7 Assemble in reverse order.
D22
NC
Z6
R94
R99 R97
R98 C71
U15
C81
D25
R87
R88
R90
C70
P8
D29
Q15
D30
D26
C59
NC
Q10
Z5
L13
L12
R91
R92
D28
Q14 D23
P10
NC
P1
P4
R95
NC
P7
P5
R93
R86
R84
D31 D32
C77
U12
R85
C76
C104
L11
F10
R117
R115
R116
R89
R114
R79
C10
C62
R83
L10
C78
R103
R102
C102
CHASSIES
C97
C101
C95
U13
C61
C68
C94
R131B
C93
C92
Q13
G
S
R101
C75
U10
R106
R104
R105
R127
C90
R130C
R130B
R130A
D18
R78
R77
R126
Q12
G
S
R111
D27
C87
Q11 B C E
R113
R82
R112
R100
R110
R118
R122
R120
R121
C100
R81
R80
R119
R123
L4
R75
C9
C58
C84
C98
L5
D17 G
R68
U8
NC
K
Z3
C52
NC
Z2
T3
R70
POT1
C56
R65
THR2
R64
R71
U7
U6
U5
R60
R61
THR1
S
U4
K
NC
R42
R41
D15
C48
R54
NC
D9
C44
T4
R59
R53
R56
R55
C47
D16 Q4
TY1
R52
R63
Q3
R58
R57
8
14
R67
C51
R69
C91
R125
R124
NC
K
A
R66
A
K
E
C
B
R51
R76
R62
C27
D13
C83
U11
7
1
D24
8
14
D11
Q2
Z1
D14
A
NC
7
1
NC
K
A
K
NC
D12
R40
C36
R39
D6
K
C46
C6
C4
C8
NC
D7
U2
C31
C15
C34
TR1
R131C
C45
C29
R37
C26
R36
R38
U3
R131A
R14
R15
Q1
U1
C21
C20
L2
PT2
R30
D33
D10
D8
C32
C33
NC
C28
D2
R31
C22
VAR1
C12
RB1
T2
C2
T1
R33
C19
C24
C18
D5
D4
D3
136
D1
L1
PT1
P6
C5
C3
C7
L3
16
CHASSIE
X1
SW1
12.3 Components
1-971631-25 Power Supply Unit; Component side
F2
F1
C1
R3
R2
R1
C13 R13
C11
R12
R4 R5 R6
R11
R10A
R10B
R10C
R10D
R10F
R10E
R10I
R9
R26
R27
R28
R29
C30
R10G
R10H
C25
R35
R10J
R7
R8
C23 R32
R18 R17 R16
C14
C42
C35
R21 R20 R19
C40 R45 R46 R47
R22 R23 R24

C43
R25
C41 R48 R49 R50

R43 C37
R44D
R44B
R44C
R44A
C50
R73B
R73C
R73A
R74A
C55
C53
C54
R74B
R74C
C57
C85
C103
C99
C96
C60
R128
R129
C63
C64
C65
C66
C80 C67
R96
C88
C69
1-971631-25 Power Supply Unit; Soldering side
SURGE PROTECTOR
SURGE PROTECTOR
PT2
C3
C2
C7
T1
C8
C4
C6
VAR1
SW1
R2
C1
GND
AC2
R3
CHASSIE
90-265VAC
AC1
C11
270K
VARISTOR
T2
X1
R1
AC
R7
AC
C5
C12
R10J
R10I
R10H
R10G
R10F
R10E
R10D
R10C
R10B
R10A
C42
HV
D4
T4
U3
R31
R14
D13
D3
R15
CONTROL
TOP221G08A
C19
D12
128-46
TR1
10
R8
R9
Q1
G
D2
C15
Z1
C45
4
C46
C43
D5
C13
R13
R12
R11
C18
RB1
R4
R5
R6
R28
C21
C14
R16
C24
U1
UCC38503DW
OVP/ENBL
GT1
VSENSE
GT2
VAOUT
VCC
ISENSE1
CT
MOUT
RT
CAOUT
GND
IAC
PWRGND
VFF
SS2
PKLIMIT
VERR
ISENSE2
VREF
C44
PFIV
4
3
1
16
17
15
18
19
14
20
15V
R33
SHD
R27
R17
R18
R19
R20
R26
R21
R22
R23
R24
R25
12
15V
10
9
C29
5
2 R37
6
11
C28
13
7
R36
8
C31
R38
15V
PFIV
SHD
1
2
3
4
C35
D15
15V
D16
Q4
8
7
6
5
R55
U2
LIN VB
HIN HVG
VCC OUT
GND LVG
L6385
C34
D6
C36
15V
D9
D7
R54
R58
R57
U4
R76
LM393M
R56
15V
R43
R44A
R59
R42
R40
R41
R39
D
S
C
D10
Q2
Q3
T3
U8
TL431CLP
LVT817
U7
LVT817
SECONDARY
OVERVOLTAGE
SHUT DOWN
U6
4
1 R65
G
D17
S
R74C
R74B
R74A
C54
15V
2
4
LVT817
U5
R63
THR2
THR1
C53
1
2
3
L4
Z3
1
1 2 3
D18
5
6
7
C52
24VP
POT1
R67
Z2
R71
24VP
REF
C50
C51
80 DEG
5-80 DEG
OVERHEAT 15V TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SENSOR
15V
LM393M
U4
R62
R60
R52
A
R44B
C
D11
A
D
C30
C22
R29
R30
C20
R32
L1
L2
R73A
HV
R44C
1
2
C41
11
12
13
14
84-14
8
9
10
D1
C26
C32
C25
C33
R35
R73C
10
11
12
C27
F1
1 TY1 3
F2
1
3
2
C23
1
2
3
6
7
8
C
A
D14
R51
C
E
C37
R53
C40
R45
R46
R47
R48
R49
R50
S
R44D
R61
D8
C48
C47
8
4
R70
R69
C
A
C
A
C
A
R73B
+
R64
+
R68
C58
C56
24VP
R78
C10
PFI_DET
5V
TEMP_MON
PSU CTRL
5V
R79
C9
CHASSIES
L5
C59
24V
VGATE
24V POWER OUT
R75
R77
R66
L3
C57
138
C55
6
7
8
12.4 Schematics
1-971631-25 Power Supply Unit; AC to 24VDC
1K6
PT1
PFI_DET
TEMP_MON
PSU CTRL
CPU P41
5V?
2
C65
C68
C64
5V
SCL
SDA
STEPPER8
STEPPER9
P24EN
PSU_INT_N
PSU_NOT_N
STEPPER4
STEPPER5
STEPPER6
STEPPER7
5V
PIC_RESET
DIR
STEP
R94
STEPPER3
STMC4
STMC3
STMC2
STMC1
TPHV
TT_PWM
C67
L13
C63
HOME_N
R85
24VS
24VS
5V
D
R99
Z6
S
B
P24ON
U15
LVT817
Q10
Q14
5V
5V
8
19
20
AD24V 2
3
STMC2 4
5
STMC3 6
STMC4 7
9
10
5V
C
B
P8
1
2
3
4
5
GND
CLKIN INT/RB0
CLKOUT
RB1
RB2
MCLR/VPP
RB3
RB4
RB5
RA0
RB6
RB7
RA1
RA2
RA3/VREF
RA4/TOCKI RC0
RA5
RC1
RC2
RC3
RC4
VCC
RC5
RC6
GND
RC7
PIC16F87204
U10
5V
ISR CONNECTOR
P5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
25
26
27 B
28 C
13
5V
12
STEP
DIR
FAN_PWM
SCL
SDA
RESET_N
MS1
MS2
P24EN
PFI_DET
PSU_NOT_N
PSU_INT_N
P24ON
AHCT14
U12
R101
R103 B
24VS
Q15
Q13
Q12
VOUT
GND/ADJ
5.0V
U11
VIN
R93
C81
1
2
5V
1
2
P6
5V
FAN-
FAN+
11
AHCT14
U12
AHCT14
U12
AHCT14
U12
AHCT14
U12
10 R114
STEPPER MOTOR CURRENT CONTROL
FAN DRIVER
24VS
P7
D24
R105
U12
AHCT14
C83
R104
Q11
24VS
TT-MOTOR DRIVER
R106
24V_PH
D33
C60
L12
P1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
F10
R80
L11
C71
L10
R97
R98
R95
CPU CON
R82
R100
C
E
S
D
D
S
R111
Z5
8 R115
6 R116
4 R117
5V
HOME_N
MS1
MS2
STEP
DIR
RESET_N
R128
R129
27
42
41
4
20
19
31
5
26
14
9
10
15
C102
C103
R129 MOUNTED IF
EXTERNAL DIODES
ELSE R128
R127
C66
3A
R81
C101
C100
RC1
RC2
PFD
REF
SR_N
STEP
DIR
HOME_N
MS1
MS2
U13
A3977
RESET_N
SLEEP_N
ENABLE_N
24VS
STEPPER MOTOR DRIVER
5V
VDD
C69
R96
R90
D23
VREG
C77
R86
R84
R88
R87
C76
C
E
R83
D22
R89
C75
C78
6
40
18
28
3
21 C94
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2A
OUT2B
SENSE1
SENSE2
32
16
37
CP1
C62
C104
C80
38
CP2
C61
R91
R92
R113
C85
36
VCP
24V
C88
R122
R123
C99
24 V TPH OUT
C87
R124
R125
R118
R119
R120
R121
TPH 24V SWITCH
C92
R102
R110
R112
C84
10K
C91
C98
C70
C93
D29
VGATE
R126
43
25
VBB
VBB
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
1
2
11
12
13
22
23
24
33
34
35
44
C95
+
R130A
D25
C96
D31
R131A
D32
D28
C97
D30
D26
R130B
R131B
D27
R130C
R131C
24 V POWER IN
P10
1
2
3
4
STEPPER MOTOR
1-971631-25 Power Supply Unit; Driver and CPU Interfaces
C90
140
13
CPU Board
This chapter describes the CPU board which is fitted in the electronics
compartment, see Chapter 11.
compartment!
Before touching the CPU board, take precautions to aviod any
electrostatic discharges.
Description
Circuits
Connectors
Test points
Startup
Components
Schematics
Note: Devices and file systems, such as "/c:" or "uart1:", are only used in
Fingerprint. Some may also exist in IPL, but are hidden to the user.
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.1 Description
The CPU board is a four-layer board with most of its circuits surfacemounted. Inside the laminate are a combined VCC layer (5V/3.3V/2.5V)
and a GND layer. The front and back sides are signal routing layers.
The hardware contains of the following main functions:
Processor core
Thermal printhead driver
Stepper motor control logic
Sensor drivers
Communication, such as UART, USB, etc.
Flash memory SIMM for the firmware and non-volatile storage
SDRAM SIMM for working memory
A/D converter for sensor adjustment, etc.
Compact Flash memory card expansion
Expansion bus
PCI bus (custom)
Network
card
UART
PCI bus 8
(custom)
Wand
Beeper
iButton
CPU
RISC core
Memory controller
PCI interface
SDRAM
Clock
48 MHz
Compact Flash
CLIC
Support logic
Board id
Reset
Sensors
A/D converter
TPH
Console
Finisher
CPU board
EEPROM
Bus isolation
Flash memory
PSA
TPH logic
Stepper logic
Interrupt
I2C master
I2C bus
Exp. interface
PSU/Motor
interface
6
USB
Optional board
(Optional board)
(only one optional
board in PF-series)
Stepper control signals

7
Power conversion 24V In

5V
3.3V
2.5V
1-971630-25 CPU board; Block Diagram

(numbers refer to schematics in Section 13.7)
142
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.2 Circuits
Components mentioned in this chapter are marked with gray in the
drawing below.
1-971630-00 PO2
J20
J21
J10
COMPACT FLASH
J30
RTC & PROGRAM KEY
U13
Processor
U30
Support
Chip
P35
BOOT-FLASH
Processor (U13)
The processor is a 32-bit RISC offering about 125 MIPS at the internal
clock speed 96MHz. The internal bus speed is twice the external bus speed
at 48MHz. The processor has several features, such as integrated SDRAM
controller, PCI bridge, DMA, UART, timers, etc.
Support Chip (U30)

The PSA (Processor Support ASIC) is a programmable logic device, which
is programmed by the firmware at each startup. It contains most of the
printer-specific and other logic functions, such as
Printhead data and strobe control
Stepper and DC motor logic
Sensor interface
Timers and interrupt control
Control logic for bar code wand and the electronic key/RTC
I2C master
Beeper signal generation
Interface to A/D converter, console, finisher, etc.
Chapter 13CPU Board
Flash Memory (J20 and J21)

There are two sockets for Flash SIMMs (marked BOOT FLASH and
EXP FLASH). A SIMM (Single Inline Memory Module) must always
be fitted in J20 since this bank is the Bootbank. As standard, a single 4MB
flash SIMM is fitted. It contains the following sectors:
Device1 Size
Type
128K
Boot
Used for
/c
2048K User file system or Kernel
FP: Customers programs, files, images

IPL: Formats, images, fonts
/c
1856K User file system
FP: Customers programs, files, images

IPL: Formats, images, fonts
32K
TMP area
Media feed info, odometer value, etc.
32K
Parameters
Media feed info, odometer value, etc.
Startup
1
/. Devices are used in Fingerprint, but are hidden in IPL.

/. This sector can be used for the kernel or for the file system (/c). If it is used for the file
system, the kernel is placed in the file system under the /c/boot directory, which is the
normal configuration, enabling the size difference between 2048K and the real kernel
size to be used in /c. Refer to the Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx, Programmers Reference
Manual for a complete list of files stored in /c and /rom by default. The kernel includes
Fingerprint or IPL firmware, bar codes, standard fonts, standard images, Intermec Shell,
auxiliary programs, default setup values, and the EasyLAN home page files.
1
2
The flash memory retains its content at power off without any battery
backup. It consists of sectors that can be erased and written to over and
over again. This is done automatically in the background. At power-up,
the flash memory is reorganized to avoid fragmentation. Before a sector is
erased, its content will be copied to a temporary area as a safety measure
if something should go wrong, for example a power failure. For the /c file
system in Fingerprint, this area is 64K and is included in the sectors in the
table above. For the parameters, it is the 32K TMP sector.
The Boot sector is necessary for Intermec Fingerprint or IPL to start.
There is a boot sector in all flash SIMMs at delivery, but the firmware will
only accept the boot sector of a SIMM fitted in J20 (marked BOOT
FLASH). The boot sector is only protected when the flash SIMM is fitted
in socket J20 (BOOT FLASH). If you move flash SIMMs from one
CPU board to another, make sure that the SIMM containing the boot
sector is fitted in J20 (BOOT FLASH) on the other board, or the boot
sector will be overwritten.
Note: The Intermec Fingerprint firmware is either stored in the /c file
system or in a dedicated area on the boot flash (2MB large). If it is stored
in the file system, removing or exchanging an EXP FLASH in J21 may
render the printer unstartable. To cure this condition, use a CompactFlash
card containing an upgrade file (kernel) to reload the firmware.
As illustrated in the table above, a total nominal capacity of 3904K is used
for the /c file system (MIFS, or FOS) and fonts. In Fingerprint, practically,
around 2 MB are available to the user (about 200-400K less if the kernel is
in the dedicated area).
Exactly which fonts, images, files, and programs are stored in the
Fingerprint file system may vary between customers and applications.
144
Chapter 13CPU Board
The parameters sectors store the PFSVARs (see SETPFSVAR Fingerprint

statement), odometer values, and a few other invisible files with data,
that are required for the printer to start up with the same settings as when
it was shut off, for example information on the position of label gaps in
relation to the LSS.
The printers permanent memory can be expanded by fitting a second
4MB or 8MB flash memory SIMMs in sockets J21. 4MB and 8MB flash
SIMMs can be mixed at will. Flash SIMMs are custom-made and can only
be ordered from Intermec.
Note: The first time the printer is started with a SIMM in J21 (EXP
FLASH), the memory is not increased to enable cloning the first SIMM.
The expansion is not done until the second time the printer is started.
Flash Memory Available to the User
J20 (Boot)
J21 (Exp)
J20 (Boot)
J21 (Exp)
SUM
4MB SIMM
4MB SIMM
4 MB SIMM
1.8MB
1.8MB
1.8MB
4MB
5.8MB
4MB SIMM
8 MB SIMM
1.8MB
8MB
9.8MB
8MB SIMM
5.8MB
5.8MB
8MB SIMM
4 MB SIMM
5.8MB
4MB
9.8MB
8MB SIMM
8 MB SIMM
5.8MB
8MB
13.8MB
Chapter 13CPU Board
SDRAM Memory (J10)

The SDRAM memory (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory)
is the printers temporary memory (Fingerprint device "tmp:"). It will lose
its content when the power is switched off or at a power failure. Thus, it
should only be used for data that can easily be recreated or that are only
relevant for one power-on cycle. It is much faster than the flash memory.
Therefore, at startup the kernel is copied from the Flash memory to the
SDRAM, where the various instructions are executed.
One SDRAM SIMM (standard size 8MB) must always be installed in
socket J10 (SDRAM0-1).
The SDRAM is also used for the font cache and various buffers. The
remainder is used for the two print image buffers where the bitmap
patterns are stored prior to printing. One buffer is used for the label that
is being printed, while the other receives the bitmap for next label as the
Intermec Fingerprint instructions are processed. By switching between the
buffers, batch printing without stopping between labels can be achieved.
The size of the buffers depends on two factors:
Number of physical dots on the printhead.
Present label length setup value in dots.
Calculate the buffer size according to this formula:
(No. of dots / 8 + 4) (Media length in dots) = Buffer size in bytes
(Buffer size in bytes) / 1024 = Buffer size in kbytes
Buffer size in kbytes 2 = Memory requirement in kbytes
Example:
The number of dots on the 8 dots/mm printhead of an EasyCoder PM4i is 832.
Media; Length is set to 1500 dots (= 187.5 mm/7.38 inches)
[[(832 / 8) + 4) (1500)] / 1024] 2 = 316 kbyte total
If a longer print length or more storage space is required, the printer can
be fitted with a 16MB SDRAM instead of the standard 8MB. However,
regardless of memory size there is an absolute print length limit of 32,767
dots (4,095 mm/161.2 inches).
Electronic Key Circuit with Real-time Clock (J30)

The optional electronic key circuit is an iButton which contains a real-time
clock. It has a built-in battery backup with a life of at least 10 years. When
the printer is on, the circuit is power supplied via the CPU board and will
not consume any power from the battery. The circuit also contains 4Kbits
(500 bytes) of battery backed-up memory for the devices "lock:" and
"storage:".
The Electronic Key Circuit (J30) contains an integrated lithium
battery. Replace only with original Electronic Key Circuits from
Intermec. Dispose of used Electronic Key Circuits in compliance with
local regulations for lithium batteries.
Der elektronische Schlsselschaltkreis (J30) ist mit einer integrierten
Lithium-Batterie ausgerstet. Dieser darf nur durch elektronische
Original-Schlsselschaltkreise von Intermec ersetzt werden. Benutzte
elektronische Schlsselschaltkreise mssen unter Einhaltung rtlicher
146
Chapter 13CPU Board
behrdlicher Vorschriften fr Lithium-Batterien entsorgt werden.

Since the communication between the RISC processor and the electronic
key circuit is comparatively slow, the content of the key circuit is copied
to SDRAM at startup and used from there. At power off, the content is
read back to the key circuit, provided there is time enough. Thus, there is
a small risk that new data may be lost, before it has been saved back to the
electronic key circuit. The original data in the electronic key circuit will not
be damaged, if the read-back process should fail.
Memory Card Adapter (J22)

The CPU board has a built-in memory card adapter which can use
standard Type I CompactFlash memory cards with a size of 8MB to 1GB
(thickness 3.3 mm/0.13 in.). It is not suited for other types of memory or
I/O cards! Cards marked CF+ and Type II cards (thickness 5.0 mm/0.20
in.) cannot be used.
In Fingerprint, CompactFlash cards can be used to expand the printers
memory (device "card1:"). IPL does not support CompactFlash cards as a
means of expanding the memory.
Memory cards are only detected by the firmware at startup and must thus
be inserted in the memory card adapter before the power is switched on or
the printer is rebooted.
Switch off the power to the printer before you insert or remove any
memory cards.
Die Stromversorgung des Druckers abschalten, bevor Speicherkarten
eingesetzt oder entfernt werden.
Preprogrammed CompactFlash Memory Cards
There are four types of preprogrammed CompactFlash memory cards from

Intermec.
Font Cards
Font stored in font cards can only be used while the card is present in the
printers memory card adapter.
Font Install Cards (Fingerprint only)
Install additional fonts in the printers memory. These fonts can be used
without the card being present.
Firmware Cards
Install a new firmware kernel in the printer including standard fonts. Used
for upgrading the firmware or switching between Fingerprint and IPL.
Configuration Cards
Configures a CPU board for the type of printer in which it is installed, see
Section 13.8, or changes the printers EasyLAN setup.
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.3 Connections
RIBBON
POWER
J56
J50
PCI
1-971630-00 PO2
CONSOLE
The following connectors on the CPU board are used in the printer for
communication with various devices and sensors.
J52
J84
J59
P35
J40
J58
J54
HEADLIFT BM
J55
GAP
J61
J61
RS232
WAND
PRINTHEAD
J62
USB
J60
EXP BOARD
J57
PAPER
J53 LTS
J51
FINISHER
Left side (from top down)

J59
Bar Code Wand (not supported by IPL)
J61
RS-232
J60
USB
Bottom (from left to right)
J62
Expansion board(s) (optional interface boards)
J57
Paper Sensor (option, not supported by IPL)
J53
Label Taken Sensor (option)
J51
Finisher
Top (from left to right)
J84
PCI (EasyLAN interface, option)
J50
Console (keyboard, display, and print or feed/pause button)
Right side (from top down)
J56
Ribbon Low sensor
J52
Power from PSU
J40
Data to printhead
J55
LSS (gap)
J54
LSS (black mark)
J58
Headlift sensor
148
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.4 Test Points

The CPU board is provided with many test points. Only those of
immediate interest to the field szervice technician are shown below. If
further testing or servicing is required, exchange the CPU board and return
the faulty board to a service center.
1-971630-00 PO2
DEBUG
J23
F70
WAND
P35
2.5V
DONE
R718
3.3V
GND
Test Points
If available, use an oscilloscope to measure the various voltages. When

using for example a multimeter, a fluttering value may indicate an
erroneous voltage.
GND
Ground
2.5V
2.5V > GND (max 0.2V)
3.3V
3.3V > GND (max 0.2V)
5.0V
R718 > GND (max 0.2V)
24V

F10 left side > GND (allowed deviation, see Chapter 12)
(If no voltage on the left side, check the right side. If voltage
there, fuse is blown, else cable or PSU trouble.)
DONE High level = U30 programmed, see Section 13.5

DEBUG Startup check, see Section 13.5
WAND Use an oscilloscope. OK if there is a pulse train when the wand is
reading a bar code.
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.5 Startup
The prerequisite for the printer to start is that a flash memory SIMM with
a boot sector is fitted in J20. A SDRAM SIMM must also be installed in
J10.
At power up, the printer starts executing code in the boot sector and one of
the following sequences will be performed:
1. A Compact Flash card with a firmware is recognized.
- The firmware will be copied from the memory card to the internal
SDRAM.
- The processor will start to execute code from SDRAM.
- The firmware on the memory card will be copied to the internal flash
memory.
2. A valid firmware is recognized in the internal flash memory.
- The firmware will be copied to SDRAM and the processor will start
execute code from SDRAM.
If the printer is fitted with an EasyLAN interface, there are also facilities
for updating the firmware from the printers home page.
After the initial boot sequence is performed, the number of steps will be
taken before the printer starts, which includes programming the support
chip (U30). The startup procedure can be followed on the printers display.
You can also follow the startup from the host provided a strap is
temporarily fitted at J23 (DEBUG) on the CPU board. Connection
between printer and host should use the default serial communication
setup (9600 baud, 8 bits, parity none, 1 stop bit) on the standard serial
port "uart1:". For each of the steps, either OK or Fail is returned on
"uart1:". In addition, some other useful information is also returned.
Refer to Appendix B for information on how to upgrade the firmware.
150
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.6 Components
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Component Side

Chapter 13CPU Board
R549
R548
R547
C538
R984
R986
R979
R982
C915
R910
R901
C984
C914
C913
C983
R201 C986
C912
C911
C932
C946
C943
C931
C926
C945
C942
C930
C906
C944
C927
C907
R836
R929
R930
R832
R135
R134
R133
R132
R131
C985
C982
009R
C947
C909 C908
309R
C928
209R
109C
C929
C925
R811
R831
R815
R881
R870
R868
R865
R871
R862
R861
R853
R852
R880
R879
R886
R885
R858
R857
R849
R848
R876
R882
R838
R824
R808
R829
R813
R839
R841
R844
R846
R810
R826
R875
R928
R816
R800
R821
R805
R833
R818
R802
R823
R814
R807
R872
R827
R830
R845
R843
R842
R840
R809
R812
R825
R828
R837
R835
R834
R803
R819
R806
R822
R801
R817
R804
R820
R927
R873
R874
R883
R884
R855
R856
R850
R851
R877
R878
R887
R888
R859
R860
R854
R863
R864
R866
R867
R869
R209
C992
C977
R210
R890
R889
R976
R987
R971
R968
R988
C987
C910
R111
C988
C989
C533
R530
R991
R931
R933
R899
R994
R997
R964
R961
R958
R956
C948
C902
C922
C715
C949
R953
R950
C950
C903
C939
C923
C916
C990
C991
C934
C904
C940
C924
C917
C919
C918
C920
C935
C905
C941
C539
R425
C407
C969
C933
C936
C937
R336
C31
R337
R338
R334
C33
R426
R427
C968
C707
C718
R725
C711
R333
C32
R335
C30
C408
C409
R542
R516
C505
R429
R428
C535 R540 R538
R539
C534 R545 R543 C536
C713
C981
C980
C979
C978
R628
R627
R626
R329
152
R541
C714
R513
C502
R546
R519
C537
C970
C530
R533
R537
R536
R535
R534
R515
C504
C531
R532
C532
R531
R514
C503
C513
R518
R512
C501
R544
C506
R517
R207
R208
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Soldering Side
SD_BE0_N
SD_BE1_N
SD_A12
14
13
10
11
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
14
7
15
4
12
5
13
2
10
3
11
D25
D9
J10
D17
D1
CKE0
SDA13
SDA14
VCC6
RAS*
CAS*
SDA1
SDA2
SDA3
VCC2
SDA4
SDA5
NC2
SDA10
SDA11
NC3
NC4
PD1
PD0
SDA12
NC1
DQM0
DQM1
VSS9
CS1*
SDA9
VCC4
WE*
CS0*
SDA8
D31
VSS8
D23
D7
VSS4
D30
D14
D15
D22
VCC7
VCC3
D6
D21
D29
D13
D28
D5
D20
D12
VSS3
D4
DQM3
VSS7
SDA7
DQM2
CLK0
SDA0
SDA6
D27
VSS6
D19
D3
VSS2
D26
D10
D11
D18
D2
VCC5
D24
VCC1
D16
D8
VSS5
D0
VSS1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
22
30
23
31
20
28
21
29
18
26
19
27
16
24
17
25
15
SD_PD1
SD_PD0
SD_WE_N
SD_CS0_N
SD_CS1_N
SD_RAS_N
SD_CAS_N
SD_BE2_N
SD_BE3_N
SD_CLK
SD_CKE
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
13
10
11
20
RESET_N
R158
R159
R155
R156
R157
R154
R147
R148
R149
R150
R151
R152
R153
SD_CS2_N
SD_CS3_N
SD_A12
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
22
M_WR_N
M_WE0_N
GND20
VCCO16
M_WE2_N
M_WE3_N
M_D13
RC32332
PCI_CLK
PCI_GNT1_N
COLD_RES_N
M_D20
M_D11
M_D10
M_A22
VCCO4
GND5
M_A21
M_A20
M_A19
M_A18
M_A17
M_A16
M_A15
M_A14
VCCO3
GND4
M_A13
SD_BE3_N
SD_BE2_N
SD_CS3_N
SD_CS2_N
SD_CKE
SD_A12
M_A12
VCCI1
GND3
OUT_CLK
M_A11
M_A10
M_A9
M_A8
M_A7
M_A6
M_A5
VCCO2
GND2
M_A4
M_A3
M_A2
SD_S1_N
SD_S0_N
SD_RAS_N
SD_CS1_N
SD_CS0_N
VCCO1
GND1
U13
R110
C10
CPU_CLK
C11
C12
R111
PCI_AD7
PCI_BE0_N
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD10
GND11
VCCO9
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD15
PCI_BE1_N
PCI_PAR
PCI_SERR_N
GND12
VCCO10
PCI_PERR_N
PCI_LOCK_N
PCI_STOP_N
PCI_DS_N
PCI_TRDY_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_FRAME_N
PCI_BE2_N
GND13
VCCI4
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD23
GND14
VCCO11
PCI_BE3_N
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD25
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD30
GND15
VCCO12
PCI_AD31
M_D18
PCI_REQ0_N
GND6
PCI_GNT0_N
VCCO5
SD_BE1_N
M_D17
SD_BE0_N
M_D12
0
8
1
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
M_WE1_N
M_D14
12
19
13
18
14
3.3V
M_CS4_N
VCCI2
SDRAM_SIMM
M_CS5_N
M_D16
17
16
3.3V
M_CS3_N
M_D15
15
R144
R145
R146
M_CS2_N
MAST_CLK
2
3
4
M_CS1_N
M_D31
SDRAM SIMM
M_CS0_N
M_D0
31
0
30
R141
R142
R143
CF_CS_N
EXP1_CS_N
CS2_N
PSA_CS_N
CS0_N
M_RD_N
M_OE_N
M_D30
SD_CAS_N
SD_WE_N
VCCO15
GND7
SD_CS0_N
SD_CS1_N
SD_RAS_N
0
1
UART_TX0
M_D19
UART_RX0
SD_245_OE_N
GND19
VCCO6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
M_WAIT_N
M_D1
R137
R138
R139
R140
M_245_OE_N
M_D29
SD_OE_N
SD_WE_N
SD_CAS_N
SD_BE0_N
SD_BE1_N
DMA_RDY0_N
M_D2
SPI_MOSI
M_D28
PSA_CLK
SPI_MISO
M_D3
CLIC_CLK
SPI_SCK
M_D27
R136
SPI_SS_N
M_D4
1
29
2
28
3
27
4
2
VCCI7
VCCP
VCCI6
GNDP
GND
GND18
M_D26
CY2071A
DB_CPU_DMA_N
GND8
OE/FS
DB_CPU_ACK_N
VCCI3
8
VCCI5
M_D5
26
5
R100
DB_CPU_ADS_N
245_DT_R_N
BUS_DIR_N
12Mhz
DB_CPU_ID_N
M_D25
SD_CLK
DMA_N
ACK_N
ADS_N
ID_N
EJ_DBOOT
EJTAG_DBOOT
M_D6
CPU_CLK
EJTAG_DCLK
M_D24
R103
VCCO14
GND9
R102
GND17
VCCO7
PCST2
EJTAG_PCST2
M_D7
25
6
24
7
EJATG_PCST1
M_D23
CLKC
EJATG_PCST0
M_D8
CLKB
JTAG_TRST_N
M_D22
XTALOUT
JTAG_TCK
M_D9
23
8
22
9
21
XTALIN
EJTAG_TMS
M_D21
JTAG_TMS
NMI_N
Y10
JTAG_TDO
PCI_AD0
CPU
VCCO13
GND10
R101
GND16
VCCO8
CLKA
INT1_N
PCI_AD2
U11
INT0_N
PCI_AD3
VCC
PCI_RST_N
PCI_AD4
7
3
PCI_GNT2_N
PCI_AD5
3.3V
M_WAIT_N
BUS_EN_N
DMA_DONE_N
2
3
4
PCI_INT_N
TDI
PCST1
PCST0
TRST_N
TCK
EJ_TMS
TMS
CPU_TDO
TDI
JTAG_TDI
PCI_AD1
0
1
INT1_N
INT0_N
PCI_RES_N
PCI_GNT2_N
PCI_REQ2_N
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
PCI_REQ2_N
PCI_AD6
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
2
3
4
5
6
CLOCK DRIVER
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
3.3V
10
9
8
15
14
13
12
11
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
31
PCI_CBE0_N
PCI_SERR_N
PCI_PAR
PCI_CBE1_N
PCI_CBE2_N
PCI_FRAME_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_TRDY_N
PCI_DS_N
PCI_STOP_N
PCI_LOCK_N
PCI_PERR_N
PCI_CBE3_N
PCI_CLK
PCI_GNT0_N
PCI_REQ0_N
3.3V
M_D<31..0>
M_A<22..1>
R847
R846
R845
R844
R843
R842
R841
R840
R839
R838
R837
R836
R835
R834
R833
R832
R135
R134
R133
R132
R131
R130
R129
R128
R127
R126
R125
R124
R123
PCI_AD(31..0)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
DMA_N
ADS_N
ACK_N
ID_N
PCST2
PCST1
PCST0
MODE
(INCL M_A(22..17))
UART<5..0>
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.7 Schematics
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Core (Schematics #1)
5
R200
2
3
LVC02
M_RD_N
M_WR_N
R202
3.3V
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
M_A<15..1>
SD_CLK
ADS_N
17
25
18
19
20
21
22
23
5
13
6
14
7
15
16
24
8
9
10
11
4
12
1
2
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
BUS_DIR_N
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
19
BUS_EN_N
U90
R201
3.3V
AHC245
U21
U22
&
AHC541
EN
U25
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
1D
AHC574
EN
C1
U24
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
1D
AHC574
EN
C1
U23
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
1D
AHC574
EN
C1
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
AHC245
3EN2[AB]
3EN1[BA]
G3
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R257
R256
R255
R254
R253
R252
R251
R250
R249
R248
R247
R246
R245
R244
R243
R242
R241
R240
R239
R238
R237
R236
R235
R234
R233
R232
R231
R230
R229
R228
R227
R226
R225
R224
R223
R222
R221
R220
R219
R218
R217
15
14
13
12
11
10
23
22
21
20
19
18
25
17
24
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
13
14
6
14
7
15
4
12
5
13
3.3V
CS2_N
22
21
3
2
CS0_N 15
25
24
12
5
13
6
10
3
11
4
8
1
9
2
2
10
3
11
0
8
1
9
AHC139
DMUX
0
G3
U26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
A19
A9
A2
VCC6
A4
SYSRD*
D7
PD1
A6
3
2
1
0
AHC139
DMUX
0
G3
3
2
1
0
BUS_WR_N
BUS_RD_N
7 EXP2_CS_N
6 USB_CS_N
5
4
ID_CS_N
FL_CS0_N
FL_CS1_N
FL_CS2_N
FL_CS3_N
NC9
PD0
A13
VCC4
VPP
VSS8
A5
RESET*
A12
VSS4
VCC7
FCS1*
SYSWR*
D14
D15
D6
FCS0*
NC8
D5
VCC3
NC7
D12
VSS7
NC6
D4
D13
NC5
VSS3
9
10
11
12
A23
A22
A21
A11
A3
A10
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
1
0
U26
J20
A18
VSS6
A1
A20
A17
A8
VCC2
A24
VSS2
NC4
VCC5
D11
D3
NC3
NC2
NC1
VSS5
D10
D2
VCC1
D9
A7
A16
A15
D1
D8
A14
D0
VSS1
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
BOOT FLASH
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
1
0
3.3V
20
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
14
7
15
16
1
2
J23
12
5
13
6
10
3
11
4
8
1
9
2
3.3V
DEBUG
PSA_DONE
PSA_INIT_N
PSA_PROG_N
PCI_DET_N
FL_B_PD1
FL_B_PD0
SD_PD1
SD_PD0
PCI_RES_N
RESET_N
VPP_EN
FL_B_PD0
FL_B_PD1
FL_CS0_N
FL_CS1_N
BUS_WR_N
BUS_RD_N
3.3V
R889
3EN2[AB]
R890
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
R892
0
8
1
9
2
10
3
11
R893
6
14
7
15
4
12
5
13
2
10
3
11
0
8
1
9
3.3V
R894
M_D<31..0>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
J21
SYSRD*
3.3V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CLIC
VCC4
A6
A13
A5
A12
VSS4
NC9
VSS8
PD1
PD0
VPP
RESET*
VCC7
FCS1*
SYSWR*
D7
D15
D14
FCS0*
VCC3
D6
VSS7
NC8
NC7
NC6
NC5
VCC6
A23
A22
A21
A20
VSS6
A19
A18
A17
A24
VCC5
NC4
NC3
NC2
D13
D5
D12
D4
VSS3
A4
A11
A3
A10
VCC2
A2
A9
A1
A8
VSS2
D11
D3
D10
D2
NC1
VSS5
D9
VCC1
A16
A15
A7
A14
D1
D8
D0
VSS1
EXP FLASH
CLIC_TDI
CLIC_TMS
CLIC_TCK
R895
A<25..1>
R207
TCK
TMS
TDI
IO6
IO5
IO4
IO3
GND1
IO2
IO1
IO_GCK3
IO_GCK1
IO8
R216
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
RESET_N
VPP_EN
U92
IO16
TDO
GND3
VCCIO
IO17
IO18
IO19
IO20
IO21
IO22
IO_GSR
0
1
2
3
CF_CD2_N
CF_CS0_N
D(15..0)
ARESET_N
CF_WR_N
CF_RD_N
3.3V
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
FL_CS2_N
FL_CS3_N
BUS_WR_N
BUS_RD_N
20
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
14
7
15
16
3.3V
XC9536XL
IO27
VCCINT1
R215
IO28
IO9
PSA_RES_N
P24EN
VPP_EN
U20
IO26
IO10
USB_RES_N
IO_GTS1
IO13
3EN1[BA]
R203
IO25
GND2
IO_GCK2
IO7
IO24
IO11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
VCCINT2
IO14
G3
R204
44
CLIC_CLK
43
42
41
40 BUS_WR_N
39 BUS_RD_N
38 CF_CS_N
37 ID_CS_N
36 RESET_N
35
34
IO23
IO12
IO_GTS2
IO15
7 20
6 21
5 22
EXP1_RES_N
EXP2_RES_N
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CF_CS_N
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
D15
D7
J22
CLIC_TCK
CLIC_TDO
CLIC_TDI
CLIC_TMS
R206
3.3V
CD2*
IIOCS16*
D2
D1
D0
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
VCC1
A7
A8
A9
ATASEL*
AHC32
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3.3V
U91
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
AHC32
3.3V
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
4
5
U91
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
9
10
C_2
GND2
D10
D9
D8
PDIAG*
DASP*
REG*
INPACK*
IORDY
RESET*
VS2*
CSEL*
VCC2
INTRQ
WE*
IOWR*
IORD*
VS1*
D14
D6
A10
D13
CS1*
D12
D5
CS0*
D11
D4
CD1*
D3
GND1
COMPACTFLASH
COMPACT FLASH
3.3V
MTG1
MTG2
19
R208
D<15..0>
R209
154
R210
BUS/ADDRESS
ISOLATOR/DRIVER
J24
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC
GND
CLIC_TCK
CLIC_TDO
CLIC_TDI
CLIC_TMS
JTAG
PROGRAMMING
PORT
CF_CS0_N
CF_CS1_N
MASTER MODE
WHEN CSEL*=GND
R265
RESET_N
CF_IORDY
CF_INTRQ
CF_RD_N
CF_WR_N
CF_CS1_N
CF_CD1_N
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Flash Interfaces (Schematics #2)
LTS_SEN
GAP_PRE
BM_PRE
R308
R307
R306
R305
R304
R303
R302
R301
R328
R327
R326
R325
R324
R323
R322
R321
R320
R319
R318
LTS_GAIN(7..0)
GAP_GAIN(3..0)
BM_GAIN(3..0)
BM_DRIVE(3..0)
3
2
1
0
BM_DRIVE(3..0)
BM_GAIN(3..0)
GAP_GAIN(3..0)
RL_GAIN(3..0)
FIN_IO0
FIN_IO2
FIN_IO1
FIN_NOT_N
TPH_GAIN0
TPH_MEAS_EN
TPH_CAL2
TPH_CAL1
TPH_CAL0
SDA
TPH_GAIN2
TPH_GAIN1
SCL
TCK
M_RD_N
10
11
20
IO138
6
24
7
IO113
IO111
IO114
IO115
GND20
VCCO13
VCCINT6
IO117
IO58
IO134
IO41
IO135
IO40_NC
IO136_NC
IO39
IO137
IO38
IO139
NC2
IO140
NC1
TCK
M2
VCCO16
VCCO4
CCLK
VCCO12
M0
GND7
M1
IO36
IO35
IO34
IO33
IO32
IO31_NC
IO30
IO29
IO28
GND6
VCCO3
VCCINT3
IO27
IO26
IO25
IO24
IO23
GND5
IO22
IO21
IO20
VCCINT2
IO19
VCCO2
GND4
IO18
IO17
IO16
IO15
IO14
GND3
IO13
IO12
IO11
IO10
IO9
VCCINT1
VCCO1
GND2
IO8
IO7
IO6
IO5_NC
U30
VCCO8
PROGRAM_N
INIT_N_IO70
IO71
IO72
IO73
IO74
IO75_NC
IO76
IO77
IO78
GND14
VCCO9
VCCINT7
IO79
IO80
IO81
IO82
IO83
GND15
IO84
IO85
IO86
VCCINT8
IO87
VCCO10
GND16
IO88
IO89
IO90
IO91
IO92
GND17
IO93
IO94
IO95
IO96
IO97
VCCINT9
VCCO11
GND18
IO98
IO99
IO100
IO101_NC
IO102
IO103
VCCO7
IO104
GND12
IO4
IO61
IO3
IO64_NC
DIN_IO105
IO62
DOUT_IO106
PSA
IO112_NC
IO63
IO2
XC2S30, XC2S50, XC2S100, XC2S150 &XC2S200

PINS WITH _NC NOT USED IN XC2S30
IO109
IO66
IO1
IO37
PL_INST
RL_GAIN(3..0)
PSA_CS_N
12
19
13
IO133
IO42
VCCINT12
VCCO5
R317
IO132
VCCINT4
BM_DIODE
VCCO15
GND8
WAND
BEEP
USB_INT_N
GND24
IO43
7
6
5
4
3
2
IO131
IO44
IO130
IO45
1
0
R316
IO129
IO46
R315
GND23
IO48
IBUTTON
IO127
GND9
18
14
17
16
15
IO128
IO47
LTS_DIG
HEADLIFT
3
R314
IO126
IO49
PL_GAIN(3..0)
31
30
1
IO125
IO50
VCCINT11
IO51
2
1
0
R313
PSA_CLK
GCK3
VCCINT5
RL_PRE
GND22
VCCO6
PSA_RES_N
INT0_N
INT1_N
EXP2_INT_N
EXP1_INT_N
GCK2
GND10
VCCO14
GCK1
IO124
GCK0
R312
IO123
IO52
IO120
GND11
IO122
IO53
R311
29
2
28
3
IO121
IO54
R310
GND21
IO55
3
2
1
0
PL_PRE
IO119
IO56
M_WAIT_N
CF_INTRQ
CF_IORDY
IO118
IO57
R309
27
4
26
5
25
IO116
IO59
3
2
1
0
SENSOR ADJUST
TMS
GND1
VCCINT10
IO60
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
IO110
IO65
PL_DIG
RL_DIG
2
1
0
TMS
M_WR_N
DMA_N
DMA_DONE_N
ACK_N
IO108
IO67
TMS
GND13
3.3V
ADS_N
23
8
22
9
21
IO107
IO68
TCK
CPU_TDO
TDI
IO69
M_D<31..0>
PSA_TDO
GND19
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
TDO
DONE
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
8
7
6
5
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
0
1
2
3
4
2.5V
10
13
12
11
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
STEPPER(13..0)
TPH_DATA(8..1)
PSA_INIT_N
PSA_PROG_N
PSA_DONE
DONE
PROG
INIT
AD_CS_N
TPH_STRB_N
TPH_LATCH_N
TPH_CLK
TT_PWM
AD_DO
AD_CLK
AD_DI
P24EN
CON_IO1
CON_IO2
CON_IO0
CON_NOT_N
RL_INST
PSU_INT_N
PSU_NOT_N
PSA_CS_N
CCLK
R300
3.3V
D0
PL_SEN
RL_SEN
PP32
C33
R333
R336
U32
7
LM393M
C31
R337
5V
LM393M D
5V
R334
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
PP31
PL_DIG
R338
3.3V
PP30
RL_DIG
R335
3.3V
AD_DO
AD_CS_N
AD_DI
AD_CLK
IBUTTON
C30
U32
TLC0838
5V
NC
CS*
DI
CLK
SARS
DO
SE*
REF
AGND
U31
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
COM
GND
R339
C32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.5V
GAP_SEN
BM_SEN
TPH_RES
RL_SEN
PL_SEN
THERM
LTS_INST
3.3V
R329
A/D-CONVERTER
GND
2
DATA
J30
5V
IBUTTON
8
4
PSA_TDO
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; PSA (Schematics #3)
TPH_GAIN0
TPH_GAIN1
TPH_GAIN2
R412 B
TPH_MEAS_EN
T45
R415
R413 B
R406 B
R400 B
T46
R416
T43
R407
T40
R403
R414 B
R408
R401 B
24V_S
T41
R404
T47
R417
C400
T44
R420
R418
C402
C401
R409
R402 B
R405
R421
R419
T42
C
E
E
C
C
E
D40
IN
LM358M
U41
R423
ADJ
OUT 2
U40
LM358M
U41
R422
C404
C403
THE CORRESPONDING
DIODE ON PSU
BOARD MUST BY OF
SAME TYPE
8
4
TPH_CAL0
TPH_CAL1
TPH_CAL2
156
C
DOT RESISTANCE TEST CIRCUIT
R424
C406
TPH_RES
C405
PP40
PP41
R411
R410
TPHV
R428
R426
C408
TPH_DATA<8..1>
TPH_STRB_N
TPH_LATCH_N
TPH_CLK
SCL
THERM
SDA
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
C409
R429
R427
9
8
7
6
5
2
3
4
1
19
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
19
EN
EN
VCC=5V;GND=DGND
AHCT541
&
U43
VCC=5V;GND=DGND
AHCT541
&
U42
11
12
13
14
15
18
17
16
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
C407
R425
5V
L415
R440
R439
R438
R437
R436
R435
R434
R433
R432
R431
R430
L402
L400
5V_TPH
C_1
GND_TPH
THERMAL PRINT HEAD (TPH)
J40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
I2CDATA
THERM1
I2CCLK
THERM2
STROBE1
STROBE2
LATCH
VCC
CLOCK
VCC
DATA1
GND
DATA2
GND
DATA3
GND
DATA4
GND
DATA5
GND
DATA6
GND
DATA7
GND
DATA8
GND
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Thermal Printhead Interface (Schematics #4)
R531
SCL
SDA
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
MTG1
MTG2
J59
C532
C_2
L52
L51
L50
A0
VCC
A1
WP
A2
SCL
GND SDA
24C02A
U50
C531
WAND
5V
C530
R532
CON_IO0
CON_NOT_N R533
CON_IO1
CON_IO2
8
7
6
5
5V
5V
R537
R536
R535
WAND
R500
5V
5V
WAND
GND
N/C
VCC
U51
BEEP
SMBUS2
SMBUS1
FIN_NOT_N
FIN_IO0
FIN_IO1
FIN_IO2
LTC1694
J50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
R541
R540
R539
R538
C535
5V 24V_S
C540
=1
U80
VCC=5V;GND=DGND
R621
4
5
AHC86
=1
VCC=5V;GND=DGND
9
10
U80
PSU_NOT_N
PSU_INT_N
P24EN
BEEPER
D50
J51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
STEPPER<13..0>
PSU_INT_N
R545
R544
R543
R542
FINISHER
VCC=5V;GND=DGND
11
R510
C536
AHC86
=1
U80
R509
C537
AHC86
5V
C534
R534
R547
R546
BUZZER
B60
1
2
R549
R548
24V_I
TT_PWM
C538
R530
C539
F70
8
9
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
10
11
12
13
C507
J52
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PP59
TPHV
LTS_SEN
24IGND
C700 +
5V
PSU/
MOTOR DRIVERS
CONSOLE
I2C INTERFACES
C508
C510
TONE IN
R520
TIME CAP
IN FILTER
C509 6
OUT FILTER
U52
LM567
PP57
PP58
PP55
PP56
PP51
PP50
PP53
OUT
GND
VCC
TONE
D
GAP_SEN
5V
R514
R522
R523
PL_INST
T1
R524
5V
5V
J55
1
2
3
4
GAP
J54
1
2
3
4
R525
R518
J57
1
2
3
4
C512
R526
R519
J53
1
2
3
4
LTS
LTS_INST
5V
J58
1
2
3
4
5
HEADLIFT
5V
PAPER LOW
R517
D
5V
C506
C504 R515
J56
1
2
3
4
RIBBBON LOW
PP54
C513
5V
BLACKMARK
BM_DIODE
RL_INST
R513
HEADLIFT
R516
C505
C503
C502
LTS_DIG
R521
PL_PRE
PL_SEN
RL_PRE
RL_SEN
R512
C501
GAP_PRE
BM_PRE
BM_SEN
C
E
PP52
C511
SENSORS
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Internal Interfaces (Schematics #5)
C533
0
1
2
3
4
5
3.3V
- UART_RX0 - RXD
- UART_TX0 - TXD
- SPI_MOSI - CTS
- SPI_MISO - RTS
- SPI_SCK - DSR
- PCI_GNT1_N - DTR
R625
R624
R623
BUS NO. CPU PINS RS232
UART<5..0>
A<24..1>
D<15..0>
R610
R600
USB_INT_N
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
R611
R629
C63
R618
C64
USBN9604
CS*
CLKOUT
RD*
XOUT
WR_SK
XIN
MODE0
INTR
DRQ
MODE1
DACK*
GND
A0_ALE_SI
VCC
D0_SO
GND
DD1
D2
D+
D3
V3.3
AGND
D4
D5
RESET*
D7
D6
R612
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
R613
USB_CS_N
BUS_RD_N
BUS_WR_N
USB_INT_N
R614
R601
R615
U60
R619
13
16
21
20
18
24
23
22
19
17
1
3
28
25
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
3.3V
EN*
R605
V-
V+
VCC
MAX3237E
MBAUD
SHDN*
R1IN
R2IN
R3IN
T1OUT
T2OUT
T3OUT
T4OUT
T5OUT
U61
USB_RES_N
C61
R1OUTB
R1OUT
R2OUT
R3OUT
T1IN
T2IN
T3IN
T4IN
T5IN
C2+
C2-
C1+
C1-
GND
C60
158
+
3.3V
27
15
14
8
9
11
5
6
7
10
12
R602
3.3V
26
C62
C_2
C66
L60
R604
R603
R620
3.3V
C65
24Mhz
Y60
5V
L67
L66
L65
L64
L63
L62
L61
L68
RP60
NC
C_2
REFERENCE - IBM STANDARD DB9

1
DCD - DATA CARRIER DETECT
2
RD - RECEIVE DATA
3
SD - TRANSMIT DATA
4
DTR - DATA TERMINAL READY
SG - SIGNAL GROUND
5
6
DSR - DATA SET READY
7
RTS - REQUEST TO SEND
8
CTS - CLEAR TO SEND
9
RI - RING INDICATOR
1
2 TXD
3 RXD
4 DSR
5 GND
6 DTR
7 CTS
8 RTS
9
MTG1
MTG2
J61
RS232
VDD
DD+
GND
C_2
MTG1
MTG2
1
2
3
4
J60
USB
EXP2_INT_N
EXP2_INT_N
EXP2_CS_N
EXP2_RES_N
EXP1_INT_N
EXP1_RES_N
EXP1_CS_N
EXP1_INT_N
SCL
SDA
R626
R627
BUS_WR_N
BUS_RD_N
M_WAIT_N
R628
3.3V
5V
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
NC
NC
24V_S
J62
1
35
2
36
3
37
4
38
5
39
6
40
7
41
8
42
9
43
10
44
11
45
12
46
13
47
14
48
15
49
16
50
17
51
18
52
19
53
20
54
21
55
22
56
23
57
24
58
25
59
26
60
27
61
28
62
29
63
30
64
31
65
32
66
33
67
34
68
SPARE
SPARE
SDA
SCL
SA1
RESET
CS
INT
DREQ
DACK
DACK
DREQ
INT
CS
RESET
SA1
EXP BUS
SLOT 2
SLOT 1
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; External Interfaces (Schematics #6)
5V
C709 +
24IGND
L71
R700
R701
C701
R704
R705
R706
C702
C713
VOUT
U71
GND/ADJ
VIN
C714
5V TO 3.3V
R703
R702
+ C710
3.3V
R707
C703
R709
3.3V
C704
4
3
6
5
1
2
16
15
13
U70
8
9
11
10
14
7
C1
E1
C2
E2
REF
GND
12
VCC
R710
5V
C711
3
VOUT
U72
GND/ADJ TAB
VIN
D70
T70
C715
5V TO 2.5V
TL594
DTC
FB
RT
CT
1IN+
1IN2IN+
2INOC
T71
+ C712
2.5V
R712
R711
C
E
R708
C
E
2.5V
D71
C705
R713
D72
T72
+ C717
R714
C706
C_2
LOWER LEFT ON PCB
C716
MH71 MOUNTHOLE AT
L74
24V_S
D
S
L72
R715
L70
GND
R717
R716
C718
C_1
MH70
R718
R721
R723
R722
R724
C707
THY70
R725
Z70
MOUNTHOLE CLOSEST TO 24V SOURCE

SHORT CIRCUIT DIGITAL GROUND (D)
WITH MH70 IN THIS POINT AND IN
THIS POINT ONLY!
R719
R720
2
1
24V_I
C
A
24V TO 5V CONVERTER
C708
5V
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Power (Schematics #7)
CF_CD1_N
CF_CD2_N
3.3V
1
2
VCC=5V;GND=DGND
AHC86
R850
R849
R848
J81
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
R952
R951
3.3V
R953
R902
R956
R905
R958
R957
R955
E_RESET_N
TCK
EJ_TMS
CPU_TDO
TDI
TRST_N
3 R913 B
T80
R914
3.3V
1
2
J83
R915
VDD
TPS3825
RESET*
RESET
EXT.RESET
GND
MR*
U81
3
1
RESET GENERATOR
R954
R900
R950
E_RESET_N
U80
=1
R851
EJTAG
R852
M_D(31..0)
R853
R903
PCI_AD(31..0)
R854
R901
3.3V
R855
3.3V
ARESET_N
PCI_REQ0_N
PCI_GNT0_N
PCI_INT_N
PCI_CBE3_N
PCI_CBE2_N
PCI_LOCK_N
PCI_STOP_N
PCI_TRDY_N
PCI_PAR
26
27
29
21
22
16
18
14
15
8
9
11
3
4
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
PCI_AD13
VSS3
PCI_PERR_N
VSS4
PCI_AD25
VSS7
PCI_AD31
VSS8
PCI_CLK
TRST_N
24V
PCI_DET_N
SDA
TDI
SCL
VSS10
NC1
VCC9
PCI_RST_N
PCI_REQ_N2
TDO
TMS
TCK
VSS9
PCI_INT_N
PCI_GNT_N0
VCC8
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD29
PCI_REQ_N0
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD27
VCC7
PCI_AD24
PCI_CBE_N3
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD22
VCC6
PCI_AD20
VSS6
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD17
VCC5
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD16
PCI_CBE_N2
PCI_FRAME_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_TRDY_N
VSS5
PCI_DEVSEL_N
PCI_STOP_N
VCC4
PCI_SERR_N
PCI_PAR
PCI_LOCK_N
PCI_CBE_N1
PCI_AD15
VCC3
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD9
VCC2
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD8
PCI_CBE_N0
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD6
VSS2
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD1
VCC1
J84
SCA80
PCI_AD3
VSS1
PCI_AD0
PCI
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
28
30
31
23
24
25
17
19
20
10
12
13
5
7
1
2
R873
5V
R874
R975
BUS PULL-UPS
R856
7
6
D(15..0)
R911
R857
8
7
A(25..1)
R912
R858
9
8
R959
R859
10
9
R960
R860
11
10
R961
R861
12
R962
R862
R963
13
R964
R863
R965
14
R966
R864
R967
15
R968
R865
R969
16
R970
R866
R971
17
R972
R867
R973
18
11
R875
25
19
12
R876
R976
R868
13
R877
26
20
14
R878
R977
R869
15
R879
27
21
16
R880
R978
R870
17
R881
28
22
18
R882
R979
R871
19
R883
29
23
20
R884
10
R980
R872
21
R885
11
30
24
22
R886
12
R981
25
23
R887
13
31
R974
24
R888
14
160
15
3.3V
SCL
SDA
PCI_DET_N
PCI_CLK
PCI_REQ2_N
PCI_RES_N
PCI_DS_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_FRAME_N
PCI_CBE1_N
PCI_SERR_N
PCI_PERR_N
PCI_CBE0_N
3.3V
R815
R814
R813
R812
R811
R810
R809
R808
R807
R806
R805
R804
R803
R802
R801
R800
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
R831
R830
R829
R828
R827
R826
R825
R824
R823
R822
R821
R820
R819
R818
R817
R816
3.3V
EJ_DBOOT
CF_INTRQ
PCI_CBE0_N
PCI_CBE1_N
PCI_PAR
PCI_SERR_N
PCI_PERR_N
PCI_LOCK_N
PCI_STOP_N
PCI_DS_N
PCI_TRDY_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_FRAME_N
PCI_CBE2_N
PCI_CBE3_N
PCI_REQ0_N
PCI_GNT0_N
PCI_INT_N
PCI_REQ2_N
PCI_GNT2_N
SD_CS3_N
SD_CS2_N
SD_CS1_N
SD_CS0_N
SD_OE_N
CS2_N
CS0_N
INT1_N
INT0_N
DMA_DONE_N
M_WAIT_N
PSU_NOT_N
FIN_NOT_N
CON_NOT_N
TMS
PSU_INT_N
USB_INT_N
EXP2_INT_N
EXP1_INT_N
R904
R934
R999
R998
R997
R996
R995
R994
R993
R992
R991
R990
R989
R988
R987
R986
R985
R984
R983
R982
R930
R929
R928
R927
R926
R925
R924
R923
R922
R921
R920
R933
R932
R931
R910
R899
R898
R897
R896
MISC PULL-UPS
3.3V
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Pull-ups (Schematics #8)
C904
C902
3.3V
C958
C957
C956
C955
C954
C953
C961
C951
3.3V
C905
C989
C903
C988
C901
C906
U25 AHC541
U24 AHC574
U23 AHC574
U22 AHC574
U21 AHC245
U20 AHC245
U26 AHC139
U81 RESET GENERATOR
C985
47
37
27
17
C907
203
59
193
69
3.3V
C913
C986
U13
CPU
C983
C966
C965
C976
C963
C975
C974
3.3V
C908
C914
C987
C984
U11 CLOCK DRIVER
U61 RS232 DRIVER
U60 USB DRIVER
U90 LVC02
U91 AHC32
111
5V
C952
C964
C972
C971
C970
C969
C968
C967
C920
C919
C917
121
C991
C990
C916
3.3V
C918
C910
U11 CLOCK DRIVER
C909
131
141
151
C915
173
89
C912
163
99
C911
C924
C923
C922
U80 AHC86
U32 LM393
3.3V
39
26
12
3.3V
U51 PULL-UP IC
U50 EEPROM
U43 AHCT541
U42 AHCT541
U31 A/D
U52 LM567
3.3V
C921 +
C929
208
C930
C973
24V_S
C980
C978
C992
C926
C927
C931
U92
CLIC
U41 LM358
C981
C979
C977
U30
PSA 3.3V
3.3V
C925
53
C982
197
65
3.3V
184
78
3.3V
170
92
3.3V
C928
105
117
C937
C936
C935
130
C933
3.3V
C934
144
156
C932
2.5V
C941
C940
C939
C938 +
2.5V
2.5V
38
28
13
2.5V
C942
C943
C945
U30
PSA 2.5V
197
66
183
82
181
D
5
6
8
9
11
12
C946
76
C900 +
171
1
13
10
4
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
LVC02
U90
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
LVC02
U90
VCC=3.3V;GND=DGND
LVC02
C947
118
128
143
C944
U90
91
DECOUPLING/BYPASS CAPACITORS
2.5V
C950
C949
C948
Chapter 13CPU Board
1-971630-25 CPU Board; Bypass/Decoupling (Schematics #9)
Chapter 13CPU Board
13.8 Replacing the CPU board

To replace the CPU board:
3 Remove any optional interface boards.
4 Disconnect all cables from the CPU board.
5 Remove the four #T20 Torx screws and the hexagonal spacer that hold
the CPU board to the plate that covers the power supply unit.
6 Lift out the CPU board and remove all SIMMs and any real time clock.
Take precautions against electrostatic discharge!
7 Fit the SIMMs and possibly the real-time clock on the new board and
install it in reverse order.
The same CPU-board can be used for a range of EasyCoder printers.
However, the firmware can not detect in which type of printer the CPU
board is installed. All replacement CPU boards are preprogrammed for the
EasyCoder PF2/4i-series printers, which means that a CPU board always
must be reconfigured after having been installed in an EasyCoder PM4i
printer.
If the printer feeds out labels in a peculiar way, the CPU board may
be configured for the wrong type of printer (there is a difference in the
distance between the dot line and the LSS position). You can easily check if
the CPU board is correctly configured by printing the Hardware Info or
HW test label in the Setup Mode or sending the Fingerprint instruction
PRINT VERSION$(1).
To reconfigure the CPU board
2 Insert a configuration card in the memory card slot.
3 Switch on the power.
4 Using the same method as in the Setup Mode, select the correct printer
type from the menus shown in the display window.
6 Remove the card.
7 Switch on the power again and check.
162
14
Interfaces
This chapter describes the various communication interfaces for the

EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial printers. However,
some interfaces are not supported by the Intermec Programming Language
(IPL) even though the connecors are present.
The chapter describes three categories:
Standard built-in interfaces
RS-232 interface
USB interface
Bar code wand interface (not supported by IPL)
Optional interface boards
Serial/Industrial interface board (not supported by IPL)
Double Serial interface board (not supported by IPL)
IEEE 1284 Parallel interface board
EasyLAN interface boards
EasyLAN Ethernet interface
EasyLAN Wireless interface
The printers canin addition to the standard built-in interfacesalso
be fitted with one or two optional interface boards and one EasyLAN
interface board.
Note: Device designations, such as "uart1:", "usb1:", or "net1:", only
apply to Fingerprint, not to IPL.
Chapter 14Interfaces
14.1 Introduction
In Fingerprint, "auto" is by default the standard IN and OUT
communication port, that is, the printer will scan all communication
channels for incoming data. To select a specific communication port as
standard IN and/or standard OUT port, use an Intermec Fingerprint
SETSTDIO statement (see Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx, Programmers
Reference Manual). This gives better performance. Note that many
application programs, for example Intermec Shell, contain instructions
that select the correct standard I/O for the application in question. The
settings for the selected communication channel will appear in the display
window when pressing the <info> key on the printers keyboard.
In IPL, all communication channels are always scanned for incoming data
and the firmware automatically switches to the same channel for output
too. The settings for the active communication channel will appear in the
display window when pressing the <info> key on the printers keyboard.
The standard interfaces (RS-232, USB, and Wand) are fitted directly on
the rear of the CPU board with connectors protruding through slots in the
printers rear plate. USB and Wand are not supported by IPL.
All optional interface boards, except the EasyLAN boards, are fitted in a
slot on the printers standard rear plate and connected to the CPU board
via a flat cable. If no interface board is fitted, the slot is closed by a cover
plate.
The EasyLAN boards are fitted directly to the front of the CPU board and
connected by wire to a connector or antenna. There is a provision for the
wired EasyLAN connector on the standard rear plate, but a special rear
plate is required for EasyLAN Wireless antenna. All rear plates have a slot
for an interface board as well as for the standard interface connectors.
164
14.2 RS-232 Serial Communication Port ("uart1:")

The EasyCoder PF2/4i-series printers are always fitted with one RS-232
communication port. In Intermec Fingerprint, this port is designated
"uart1:" (uart = Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitter.) The
circuitry is fitted on the CPU board (see Chapter 13) and has a fixed set of
signals in a DB-9pin female connector which protrudes through a slot in
the printers rear plate.
Protocol
Default setup
Baud rate:
Char length:
Parity:
Stop bits:
RTS/CTS:
ENQ/ACK:
XON/XOFF:
New line:
9600
8 bits
None
1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled in both directions
CR/LF
Signals on serial port "uart1:"

MTG
9
RTS out
CTS in
DTR out
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
DSR in
RXD in
TXD out
+5V DC
MTG
DB-9 socket
Signal
Meaning
External +5VDC max 500 mA (automatic switch-off at
overload, short-circuit protected)
TXD
Transmit data
RXD
Receive data
DSR
Data set ready
GND
Ground
DTR
Data terminal ready
CTS
Clear to send
RTS
Request to send
Not used
RS-232 socket
("uart1:")
14.3 USB Interface ("usb1:")

The EasyCoder PF2/4i-series printers are, as standard, fitted with a USB
(Universal Serial Bus) interface connector on the CPU board.
USB
The supported USB version is USB 1.1 (also called USB 2.0 full speed).
To use the USB interface for printing from a PC, you need a USBcompatible Intermec InterDriver installed in your PC. The printer
works only as a slave, that is, the USB interface is not suitable for
programming. Unlike for example RS-232, there is no communication
setup in regard of baud rate, parity, handshaking, etc. Select the USB
interface as standard IN/OUT channel in Intermec Fingerprint,
the Intermec Direct Protocol, or Intermec Shell as device "usb1:"
(communication channel 6).
The EasyCoder PF2/4i-series printers are so called self-powered devices.
We recommend that you only connect one printer to each USB port on
the host, either directly or via a hub. Other devices, like a keyboard and
a mouse, can be connected to the same hub. If you need to connect more
than one Intermec USB printer to a host, you should use different USB
ports.
Using a USB Class A/B cable, connect the Class A plug to the PC or hub
and the Class B plug to the printer.
USB Class A connector.

Connect to PC or hub.
166
USB Class B connector.

Connect to USB port on printers rear plate.
14.4 Bar Code Wand Interface

The printer has a socket (J59) on the CPU board for connecting a bar code
wand or scanner. The socket is accessible through a slot in the printers rear
plate. The bar code wand interface is not supported by IPL.
If the Code 128 bar code that contains the character FNC3 is read via this
port, the data will be treated as a setup string and will change the printers
setup accordingly. A setup bar code may contain a single parameter or a
combination of up to 3 or 4 setup parameters. Refer to the EasySet Bar
Code Wand Setup manual for more information on how to produce setup
bar codes.
The printer will acknowledge that a bar code has been successfully read by
emitting a short beep signal.
If no FNC3 character is found in the bar code, the data will be stored in a
buffer which could be read by specifying the "wand:" device. The buffer is
small, so it is recommended to use short bar code data (max. 36 characters)
and read the buffer regularly to avoid overflow.
For more demanding applications or for reading bar codes other than
Code 128, choose a regular bar code scanner from Intermecs wide product
range and connect it to a serial port.
Wand
14.5 Installing an Optional Interface Board

Note: This chapter does not apply to installation of any type of EasyLAN
interface board, which instead is described in Section 14.9.
To install an optional interface board
1 Open the electronics compartment, see Section 11.2.
compartment!
2 Remove the two #T10 Torx screws that hold the interface cover plate.
Remove the cover plate.
#T10 Torx screw
Cover plate
#T10 Torx screw
3 Save the cover plate for later use. Keep the screws.
4 Remove the #T20 Torx screw fitted on the hexagonal spacer at the
center of the CPU board. Keep the screw.
5 If necessary, fit or remove circuits and straps on the interface board
according to the descriptions of each board later in this chapter.
6 Attach the flat cable included in the kit to connector J62 (marked EXP
BOARD) on the CPU board (see illustration on the next page).
7 Insert the interface board with the component side facing right, as seen
from behind.
168
Component side
#T10 Torx screw
Interface board
#T10 Torx screw
8 Attach the interface board to the printers rear

plate using the two screws left over when you
removed the original cover plate.
9 Using the #T20 Torx screw you previously
removed, attach the interface board to the
hexagonal spacer at the center of the CPU
board.
P01
C64
C63
10 The kit contains two flat cables. Connect the

flat cable with two connectors to P1 on the
interface board, also see the next page. The
cable with three connectors is not used with
EasyCoder PF2/4i-series printers.
C40
R32
IC23
R33
IC20
IC24
R31
R34
R35
1-971643-01
R36
R37
C21
C60
IC26
IC27
C62
IC25
C65
C22
R41
R51
R42
R52
C23
C24
R54
R43
R53
R44
C25
C26
C27
R45
R55
R46
R56
C28
R47
R57
R48
R58
R38
R27
R26
R25
R24
R23
R22
P3
R21
R28
IC21
REL4
C61
C51
C67
IC22
IC2
IC28
REL3
REL2
IC3
C36
C34
C66
P1
P35
REL1
J62
P1
RS232: IC11, J2A

C33
RS422: IC12, J3, J4
C3
C4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
C35
IC10
* IF END OF CABLE
J2
IC11
IC13
IC12
R8
C50
R12
R18
J3
J61
R10
IC4
IC6
R16
C56
R9
J4
R7
R1
R6
R17
C31
C53
C57
IC9
R11
Cable
R4
IC1
C52
J1
R2
C55
C30
C54
P2
R3
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
C1
C2
R13
R15
C32
R5
R14
IC5
UARTA
EXP BOARD
Hexagonal
spacer
11 The flat cable should run as illustrated below.

CPU Board
Cable
Interface Board
12 Put back the cover over the electronics compartment.

13 Connect the communication cables to the connectors on the printers
rear plate.
14 Connect the power cord and switch on the power.
15 In case the interface board provides additional serial communication
ports, enter the Setup Mode to set the proper communication
parameters for these ports.
Before you install driver circuits and straps on the interface board,
make sure that the circuit is not installed upside down (see front end
markings in the illustrations). Also make sure that the circuit pins
fit into the slots in the socket and are not bent. Take precautions to
protect the board and circuits from electrostatic discharge.
Vor der Installation von Treiberschaltkreisen und Kabelbndern auf
der Schnittstellenkarte muss sichergestellt werden, dass der Schaltkreis
nicht verkehrt eingebaut ist (die Vorderkantenmarkierungen in den
Abbildungen beachten). Auerdem muss sichergestellt werden, dass
die Schaltkreisstifte in die Schlitze in der Buchse passen und nicht
verbogen werden. Vorsichtsmanahmen treffen, um die Karte und die
Schaltkreise vor elektrostatischer Entladung zu schtzen.
170
14.6 Serial/Industrial Interface Board (not IPL)

Description
The Industrial/Serial Interface Board is a Fingerprint-only optional device
for EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial. It provides these
printers with two extra interfaces.
The Serial/Industrial Interface kit contains:
One Industrial Interface Board fitted with straps and circuits for RS-232
One hexagonal spacer (not used with EasyCoder PF2/4i-series)
Two flat cables (only one is used with EasyCoder PF2/4i-series)
One Installation Instruction booklet
Serial Interface ("uart2:")
This interface contains one serial communication port ("uart2:") which can
be configured for one of the following alternatives:
RS-232 non-isolated
RS-422 isolated, full duplex (reconfiguration required)
RS-485 isolated, half duplex (reconfiguration required)
Selection of type of serial interface is decided by fitting various types of
socket-mounted driver circuits and straps.
Industrial Interface
This interface contains eight digital IN and eight digital OUT ports with
optocouplers, plus four OUT ports with relays.
The status of all ports can be read by means of PORTIN functions and
the OUT ports can be set using PORTOUT ON/OFF statements (see
Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx, Programmer's Reference Manual).Thus, it is
possible to design Intermec Fingerprint application programs which
control not only the printer but also various external devices, for example
in a production line. The digital IN ports can read the status of various
sensors and the program can, for example, switch control lamps on or off,
open or close gates, and start or stop conveyor belts accordingly using the
relays and the digital OUT ports.
Industrial interface
(DB-44pin socket)
Serial interface
"uart2:"
(DB-9pin socket)
Serial Port Configuration

The serial communication port "uart2:" is as standard configured for RS232 but can be reconfigured for two other types of serial communication
by fitting certain driver circuits and straps. The circuits can be ordered
separately from Intermec:
RS-422 isolated, full duplex
RS-485 isolated, half duplex
P01
C64
C63
RS-232 Non-isolated (standard)

C40
R32
IC23
R33
IC20
IC24
R31
R34
R35
1-971643-01
R36
R37
C21
C60
R27
IC26
R26
IC27
C62
IC25
C65
C22
R41
R51
C23
R42
R52
R43
C24
R54
R53
R44
C25
C26
R45
R55
C27
R46
R56
R47
R57
C28
R48
R58
R38
R25
R24
R23
R22
P3
R21
R28
IC21
REL4
C61
IC22
IC2
IC28
REL3
C51
C67
REL2
IC3
C36
C34
C66
REL1
P1
RS232: IC11, J2A

C33
RS422: IC12, J3, J4
C3
C4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
C35
IC10
* IF END OF CABLE
J2
R13
R15
IC13
IC12
R12
C50
R18
J3
R10
J4
IC4
IC6
R16
C56
R9
IC9
R7
R1
R6
R17
C31
C53
C57
R11
R4
IC1
C52
J1
R2
C55
C30
C54
P2
R3
RS-232 circuit fitted on

IC11
IC11
R8
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
Strap fitted on J2 A
C1
C2
C32
R5
R14
IC5
UARTA
Connector Configuration (RS-232 on "uart2:")

MTG
9
RTS out
CTS in
DTR out
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
DSR in
RXD in
TXD out
+5V DC
MTG
172
DB-9 socket
Signal
Meaning
TXD
Transmit data
RXD
Receive data
DSR
Data set ready
GND
Ground
DTR
Data terminal ready
CTS
Clear to send
RTS
Request to send
Not used
P01
C64
C63
RS-422 Isolated, Full Duplex (reconfiguration required)

C40
R32
IC23
R33
IC20
IC24
R31
R34
R35
1-971643-01
R36
R37
C21
C60
R27
IC26
R26
IC27
C62
IC25
C65
C22
R41
R51
C23
R42
R52
R43
C24
R54
R53
R44
C25
C26
R45
R55
C27
R46
R56
R47
R57
C28
R48
R58
R38
R25
R24
R23
R22
P3
R21
R28
IC21
REL4
C61
IC22
IC2
IC28
REL3
C51
C67
REL2
IC3
C36
C34
C66
REL1
P1
RS232: IC11, J2A

C33
RS422: IC12, J3, J4
C3
C4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
C35
IC10
* IF END OF CABLE
J2
R15
IC13
IC12
R12
R18
J3
R10
J4
IC4
R16
C56
R9
IC9
R7
R1
R6
R17
C31
C53
C57
R11
IC1
R2
C52
J1
R3
P2
R4
C55
C30
C54
Remove RS-232 circuit

on IC11
Fit RS-422 circuit on IC12
C50
R8
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
Fit straps on J3 and J4
IC11
IC6
Remove strap on J2 A
C1
C2
R13
C32
R5
R14
IC5
UARTA
Connector Configuration (RS-422 Isolated on "uart2:")

MTG
9
-TXD
-RXD
8
7
6
2
1
Signal
+RXD
+TXD
+5V DC
if GND strap
fitted
MTG
Meaning
overload, short-circuit protected) provided strap is fitted
on J2:A which spoils the galvanical isolation
GNDE
4
3
DB-9 socket
+TXD
+Transmit data
+RXD
+Receive data
GNDE
-RXD
-Receive data
-TXD
-Transmit data
Ground
P01
C64
C63
RS-485 Isolated, Half Duplex (reconfiguration required)

C40
R32
IC23
R33
IC20
IC24
R31
R34
R35
1-971643-01
R36
R37
C21
C60
R27
IC26
R26
IC27
C62
IC25
C65
C22
R41
R51
C23
R42
R52
R43
C24
R54
R53
R44
C25
C26
R45
R55
C27
R46
R56
R47
R57
C28
R48
R58
R38
R25
R24
R23
R22
P3
R21
R28
IC21
REL4
C61
C51
C67
IC22
IC2
IC28
REL3
REL2
IC3
C34
C66
REL1
C36
P1
RS232: IC11, J2A

C33
RS422: IC12, J3, J4
C3
C4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
C35
IC10
* IF END OF CABLE
J2
R15
IC11
IC13
IC12
R12
R18
J3
R10
IC4
R16
C56
R9
J4
IC9
R7
R1
R6
R17
C31
C53
C57
R11
IC1
R2
C52
J1
R3
P2
R4
C55
C30
C54
Fit strap on J1
C50
R8
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
Fit strap on J4
if end of cable
(terminator)
C1
C2
R13
C32
R5
R14
IC6
UARTA
IC5
Remove RS-232 circuit

on IC11
Fit RS-485 driver circuit
on IC13

MTG
9
-DATA
8
7
6
5
3
1
Signal
+DATA
+5V DC
if GND
strap fitted
MTG
Meaning
GNDE
4
2
DB-9 socket
+DATA
GNDE
-DATA
Ground
Note: The increased use of LAN networks has made the RS-485 interface
somewhat obsolete, because RS-485 requires a special communication
protocol and a dedicated wiring system limited to 1,200 m (4,000 ft). We
only recommend RS-485 for existing applications and advice the customer
to consider a LAN network solution for new applications.
174
Industrial Interface Configuration

The Industrial Interface provides:
8 digital IN ports with optocouplers (Opto In)
8 digital OUT ports with optocouplers (Opto Out)
4 OUT ports with relays (Relay Out)
The Industrial Interface has no straps or circuits to be fitted or removed.
All signals are available on a DB-44pin socket and the various ports
are controlled by the Intermec Fingerprint instructions PORTIN and
PORTOUT ON/OFF (see Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx, Programmer's
Reference Manual).
Digital Opto In
The status of the digital IN ports 101-108 can be read using PORTIN
functions. If a current is led through the optocoupler of the port, PORTIN
returns the value -1 (true), else it returns the value 0 (false).
Signal
Vin [High]
Vin [Low]
Description
Input Voltage High
Input Voltage Low
Min.
10V
-1V
Typical
24V
0V
Max.
40V
1V
Connector Configuration
Pin
Signal Name
Description
Fingerprint Ref. No.
10
IN1A
Anode Opto In Channel 1 +
101
40
IN1K
Cathode Opto In Channel 1 -
26
IN2A
11
IN2K
41
IN3A
27
IN3K
12
IN4A
42
IN4K
28
IN5A
13
IN5K
43
IN6A
29
IN6K
14
IN7A
44
IN7K
30
IN8A
15
IN8K
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
INA
INK
GND
Simplified schematics of a digital IN port.

Digital Opto Out
The current to each optocoupler of the digital OUT ports 221-228 can be
turned on and off using PORTOUT ON/OFF statements.
The status of the ports can be read using PORTIN functions. If a current
is led through the optocoupler of the port, PORTIN returns the value -1
(true), else it returns the value 0 (false).
Signal
Vceo
Veco

Vog
Description
Max.
Collector-Emitter breakdown voltage 35V
Emitter-Collector breakdown voltage 6V
Collector Current
15 mA
Output to ground (optocoupler)
100V
Pin
Signal Name
Description
20
Out1c
Collector Opto Out Channel 1
221
Out1e
Emitter Opto Out Channel 1
35
Out2c
21
Out2e
Out3c
36
Out3e
22
Out4c
Out4e
37
Out5c
23
Out5e
Out6c
38
Out6e
24
Out7c
Out7e
39
Out8c
25
Out8e
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
VCC
OUTc
OUTa
Simplified schematics of a digital OUT port.
176
Relay Out
The relays of the OUT ports 201204 can be individually activated using
PORTOUT ON/OFF statements.
The status of the ports can be read by means of PORTIN functions. If a
relay is activated, PORTIN returns the value -1 (true), else it returns the
value 0 (false).
Max AC Load Breaking Capacity
Signal
I
Psw AC
Usw AC
Description
Current
Switching power
Switching voltage
Max.
1A
100VA AC
100V AC
Max DC Load Breaking Capacity

b
DC current (A)
0.5
0.1
10
20
30
a: resistive load
b: inductive load L/R=20 ms
40 50
100
DC Voltage (VDC)
Pin Signal Name
Description
16
REL1nc
Relay 1 Normally Closed
201
REL1no
Relay 1 Normally Open
31
REL1com
Relay 1 Common
17
REL2nc
REL2no
32
REL2com
Relay 2 Common
18
REL3nc
REL3no
33
REL3com
Relay 3 Common
19
REL4nc
REL4no
34
REL4com
Relay 4 Common
202
203
204
VCC
REL no
REL nc
REL com
Simplified schematics of a relay OUT port.
C21
C22
R51
R41
IC26
C40
IC20
IC27
C23
R52
R42
C24
R53
R43
C60
R27
R26
R25
R24
R23
R22
R21
P3
IC25
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
R36
R37
R38
C65
C64
R54
C25
IC23
C62
C26
R55
R45
C27
R56
R46
R58
R48
C28
R57
R47
IC24
R44
C63
Components
R28
IC21
REL4
IC28
C61
C67
IC2
IC22
REL3
C51
C36 C34
REL2
C66
IC3
1
35
68
P1
34
REL1
C33
RS232: IC11, J2A
C35
RS422: IC12, J3, J4
C4
C3
C2
C1
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
R8
R18
C31
R3
R2
R11
R4
C52
R6
C30
IC1
J1
IC5
R1
IC4
R7
IC6
C53
C57
C55
C54
R9
IC12
IC9
R10
C56
IC13
R16
R17
J3
R12
J4
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
R13
R15
IC11
B
J2
P2
IC10
R14
UARTA
R5 C32
C50
*: IF END OF CABLE
1-971643-26 Serial/Industrial Interface Board; Component side

178
P1
1
35
2
36
3
37
4
38
5
39
6
40
7
41
8
42
9
43
10
44
11
45
12
46
13
47
14
48
15
49
16
50
17
51
18
52
19
53
20
54
21
55
22
56
23
57
24
58
25
59
26
60
27
61
28
62
29
63
30
64
31
65
32
66
33
67
34
68
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
R1
5V
11
12
SCL
SA1
RESET_N
CS_N
INT_N
SDA
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
WR_N
RD_N
WAIT_N
1
2
3
4
R2
IC1
R3
9
10
9
10
C50 +
A0
VCC
WP
A1
A2
SCL
GND SDA
INTA
WR_N
4
5
1
2
1
2
3.3V
RESET_N
A<12..1>
D<15..0>
8
7
6
5
INT_N
3.3V
IC3
VCC
5V
3
R5
3.3V
D5
D6
D7
RCLK
IC10
SIN
NC
SOUT
16C550
CS0
CS1
CS2*
BAUDOUT*
1.8432MHZ
NC/EN_N OUT 3
GND
WRB_N
CSB_N
CSA_N
3 RESET
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
GND
IC2
CLK
VIN VOUT
LD1117
C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57
5V
AHC86
IC5
=1
VCC=3.3V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC86
IC5
=1
VCC=3.3V
5
6
7
3.3V
+24VI
4
3
2
1
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
44
43
42
41
40
MR
OUT1*
DTR*
RTS*
OUT2*
NC
INTRPT
RXRDY*
A0
A1
A2
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
NC
VCC
RI*
DCD*
DSR*
CTS*
XIN
XOUT
WR1*
WR2
VSS
NC
RD1*
RD2
DDIS
TXRDY*
ADS*
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
1
2
3
INTA
RESET
=1
12
13
5V
11
9
10
=1
AHCT86
IC6
VCC=5V
AHC86
IC5
=1
VCC=3.3V
AHCT86
IC6
=1
VCC=5V
DSRA_N
TXDA
11
R4
12 RXDA
13
DTRA_N
RTSA_N
12 CTSA_N
13
4
5
3.3V
AHCT86
IC6
=1
VCC=5V
AHCT86
IC6
=1
VCC=5V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC86
IC5
VCC=3.3V
J1
1
RS485
2
4
5
1
2
11
R6
5V
DCDA_N
INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
RS232: IC11, J2A
RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36
3.3V
18
19
WR_N 20
21
22
23
RD_N 24
25
26
27
28
1
485_DIR
5V
R10
C2
C1
R11
R9
R7
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10
12
13
14
5
18
19
21
6
4
22
17
R8
RS232
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
MAX1480
VCC1
AC1
VCC2
AC2
D1
IVCC1
D2
B
GND1
IRCDRV
FS
A
SD
IDIIN
VCC3
IDEIN
DI
ICOM1
VCC4
IDIDRV
DE
IVCC2
GND2
IDEDRV
RO_N
ICOM2
VCC5
IRLED
IC13
RS485
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
9
11
15
8
2
1
24
20
7
3
23
16
5V
MAX1490
VCC1
AC1
VCC2
AC2
D1
IVCC1
D2
IRCDRV
A
GND1
FS
B
SD
Z
VCC3
Y
DI
ICOM1
VCC4
IDIDRV
RO
IVCC2
GND2
IRLED
IC12
RS422
IC11
MAX238
C1+
VCC
C1V+
C2+
VC2GND
T1IN
T1OUT
T2IN
T2OUT
T3IN
T3OUT
T4IN
T4OUT
R1OUT R1IN
R2OUT R2IN
R3OUT R3IN
R4OUT R4IN
R18
OVERCURRENT_N
5V_EXT_EN_N
5V
R14
R13
R12
C4
GND
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
EN_N OC_N
8
7
6
5
POWER_SWITCH
C3
1
2
3
4
SWITCH FOR
EXTERNAL 5V
IC9
R15
R17
R16
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
1
2
1
2
TERM.TRA.
J4
J3
9
MTG1
MTG2
P2
RS232
1 +5V
2 TXD
3 RXD
4 DSR
5 GND
6 DTR
7 CTS
8 RTS
TERM.REC.
1 A J2
2B
3
GND-SHIELD
5V_EXT
9PIN DSUB
+DATA
-RXD
-TXD
-DATA
GNDE GNDE
+TXD
+RXD
RS422 RS485
Schematics; Serial Port
1-971643-26 Serial/Industrial Interface Board; Schematics 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
1
11
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
&
AHC541
EN
IC20
VCC=5V
ULN2003A
IC28
ULN2003A
IC28
VCC=3.3V
AHCT273
RESET
CLK
IC21
VCC=5V
AHCT273
D
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67
5V
C40
3.3V
CSB_N
RD_N
D<15..0>
RESET_N
WRB_N
8
9
10
11
RESET
CLK
12 R25
ULN2003A
IC27
ULN2003A
IC27
ULN2003A
IC27
ULN2003A
R31
R32
R33
R34
R35
R36
R37
R38
11
10
13
12
15
14
16
6
7
4
5
2
3
OPTO_COUPLER
6
7
11
10
2
3
11
10
13
12
15
14
16
11
10
13
12
15
14
16
4
5
IC23
OPTO_COUPLER
IC24
OPTO_COUPLER
IC25
OPTO_COUPLER
IC26
13
12
15
14
16
6
7
15 R22
16 R21
4
5
14 R23
2
3
6
7
11 R26
4
5
10 R27
1
2
3
5V
16 R28
15
14
NO
14
11
12
NO
14
11
12
NO
14
11
12
R41
R42
R43
R44
R45
R46
R47
R48
R58
NC
COM
C21
R51
C22
R52
C23
R53
C24
R54
C25
R55
C26
R56
C27
R57
C28
REL4
REL3
NC
COM
REL2
NC
COM
REL1
NC
COM
NO
5V
A1
A1
13
VCC=5V
IC27
13 R24
ULN2003A
IC27
ULN2003A
IC27
ULN2003A
IC27
ULN2003A
IC28
ULN2003A
IC28
ULN2003A
IC28
A2
A2
IC28
ULN2003A
A1
A1
ULN2003A
A2
A2
4
A1
A1
IC22
A2
A2
1
11
A1
A1
VCC=5V
IC28
12
A2
180
A2
14
11
12
MTG1
MTG2
27
26
11
10
40
42
41
29
28
13
12
44
43
P3
16
1
31
17
2
32
18
3
33
19
4
34
20
5
35
21
6
36
22
7
37
23
8
38
24
9
39
25
30
15
14
SIGNALS
REL1NC
REL1NO
REL1COM
REL2NC
REL2NO
REL2COM
REL3NC
REL3NO
REL3COM
REL4NC
REL4NO
REL4COM
OUT1C
OUT1E
OUT2C
OUT2E
OUT3C
OUT3E
OUT4C
OUT4E
OUT5C
OUT5E
OUT6C
OUT6E
OUT7C
OUT7E
OUT8C
OUT8E
IN8A
IN8K
IN7A
IN7K
IN6A
IN6K
IN5A
IN5K
IN4A
IN4K
IN3A
IN3K
IN2A
IN2K
IN1A
IN1K
DSUB44
Schematics; Industrial Interface
1-971643-26 Serial/Industrial Interface Board; Schematics 2
14.7 Double Serial Interface Board (not IPL)

Description
The Double Serial Interface Board (DUART) is a Fingerprint-only
optional device for EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial.
It provides these printers with two extra serial interfaces.
"uart2:"
This interface can be fitted with straps and circuits for one of the following
alternatives:
RS-232 non-isolated
"uart3:"
This interface can be fitted with straps and circuits for one of the following
alternatives:
RS-232 non-isolated
RS-422 non isolated, full duplex
20 mA Current Loop.
The Double Serial Interface Kit contains:
One interface board fitted for RS-232 on both ports.
Circuits for modifying the board for RS-422 non-isolated, RS-422
isolated, RS-485 isolated, or 20 mA current loop can be bought separately
from Intermec.
"uart3:"
(DB-9pin socket)
"uart2:"
(DB-9pin socket)
"uart2:" Configuration
The serial communication port "uart2:" can be configured for three
different types of serial communication by fitting or removing certain
driver circuits and straps:
RS-232 non-isolated

IC23
B
IC21
C11
C10
C12
1-971642-01
R24
R23
C63
R22
R27
R30
R28
R26
NC
J9 R19
F9
C64
IC8
R29
IC7
R25
D1
Z1
C62
J8 A
R20
IC24
C40
R32
P3
J5
C13
IC22
R31
R33 R34
C60
NC
Z2
R21
F14 F10 F15 F11 F16 F12
J10 R35
J7
C61
F13
C36
RS232: IC21, J6A

RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5 J9*, J10*
*: TRANSM.=J9, RECEIV.=J10
PASSIVE=B, ACTIVE=A+C
C41
IC20
C42
C34
RS232: IC11, J2A

RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
J2
R13
IC11
C33
IC13
IC12
R18
R10
R12
R16
R9
IC4
C56
J3
R1
IC1
R3
J1
R2
C55
C54
R4
P2
R11
C30
IC9
IC5
R7
R17
R6
C31
C53
C57
J4
C52
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
RS-232 circuit fitted on

IC11
C50
R8
R15
C51
C32
C1
C2
IC10
R5
R14
C35
C3
C4
P1
IC2
IC3
IC6
UARTA
P01
J6
NC
UARTB

MTG
9
RTS out
CTS in
DTR out
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
DSR in
RXD in
TXD out
+5V DC
MTG
182
DB-9 socket
Signal
Meaning
TXD
Transmit data
RXD
Receive data
DSR
Data set ready
GND
Ground
DTR
Data terminal ready
CTS
Clear to send
RTS
Request to send
Not used
RS-422 Isolated, Full Duplex (reconfiguration required)

IC23
B
IC21
C11
C10
1-971642-01
R24
R23
R22
C60
IC8
C13
IC22
R31
R33 R34
R28
R26
NC
J9 R19
C64
R29
IC7
R25
D1
Z1
C62
J8 A
R20
IC24
C40
R32
P3
J5
K
NC
Z2
C61
C63
C36
RS232: IC21, J6A

RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5 J9*, J10*
C41
IC20
C42
C34
RS232: IC11, J2A

RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
C3
J2
R13
IC11
IC2
IC12
R8
R18
R10
R12
R16
R9
IC4
C56
J3
R1
IC1
R3
J1
R2
C54
R4
P2
R11
C30
IC9
IC5
R7
R17
R6
C31
C53
C57
J4
C55
Fit RS-422 circuit on IC12
C50
C52
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
C51
IC13
R15
Fit straps on J3 and J4
IC10
C32
C1
C2
P1
R5
C4
R14
C35
IC6
UARTA
IC3
C33
P01
R27
R30
R21
F14 F10 F15 F11 F16 F12
J10 R35
J7
F9
Remove RS-232 circuit on

IC11
C12
J6
F13
NC
UARTB

DB-9 socket
Signal
1
9
-TXD
-RXD
8
7
6
5
3
2
1

GNDE
+RXD
+TXD
+5V (0.5 A)
if GND strap
fitted
Meaning
+TXD
+Transmit data
+RXD
+Receive data
GNDE
-RXD
-Receive data
-TXD
-Transmit data
Ground
RS-485 Isolated, Half Duplex (reconfiguration required)

IC23
B
IC21
C11
C10
1-971642-01
R24
R23
R22
C63
A
C60
IC8
C13
IC22
R31
R33 R34
R28
R26
NC
J9 R19
C64
R29
IC7
R25
D1
Z1
C62
J8 A
R20
IC24
C40
R32
P3
J5
K
NC
Z2
F9
C36
RS232: IC21, J6A

RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5 J9*, J10*
C41
IC20
C42
C34
RS232: IC11, J2A

RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
R13
IC11
IC2
C32
IC12
R8
R18
R10
R12
R16
R9
IC4
C56
J3
R1
R3
J1
R2
R4
C55
C54
R11
C30
IC9
IC5
R7
R17
R6
C31
C53
C57
J4
P2
C50
IC1
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
C51
IC13
R15
Fit strap on J4
if end of cable
(terminator)
IC10
C52
J2
C1
C2
P1
R5
Fit RS-485 driver

circuit on IC13
C3
C4
R14
C35
IC6
UARTA
IC3
C33
P01
R27
R30
C61
F14 F10 F15 F11 F16 F12
J10 R35
J7
R21
F13
Remove RS-232 circuit on

IC11
C12
J6
NC
UARTB
Fit strap on J1

DB-9 socket
Signal
1
9
-DATA
8
7
6

GNDE
4
3
2
1
+DATA
+5V (0.5 A)
if GND strap
fitted
Meaning
+DATA
GNDE
-DATA
Ground
Note: The increased use of LAN networks has made the RS-485 interface
somewhat obsolete, because RS-485 requires a special communication
protocol and a dedicated wiring system limited to 1,200 m (4,000 ft). We
only recommend RS-485 for existing applications and advice the customer
to consider a LAN network solution for new applications.
184
"uart3:" Configuration
The serial communication port uart3: can be configured for three different
types of serial communication by fitting or removing certain driver circuits
and straps:
RS-232 non-isolated
RS-422 non-isolated, full duplex
20 mA Current Loop

IC23
B
IC21
C11
C10
C12
1-971642-01
R24
R23
C63
R22
R27
R30
C60
IC8
C13
IC22
R31
R33 R34
R28
R26
J9 R19
NC
J8 A
F9
C64
R29
IC7
R25
D1
Z1
C62
R20
IC24
C40
R32
P3
J5
NC
Z2
C61
F14 F10 F15 F11 F16 F12
J10 R35
J7
R21
F13
C36
RS232: IC21, J6A

RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5 J9*, J10*
C41
IC20
C42
C34
RS232: IC11, J2A

RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
J2
C1
C2
A
R13
IC11
IC2
C51
IC13
IC12
R18
R10
R12
R16
R9
IC4
C56
J3
R1
IC1
C52
R3
J1
R2
R4
C55
C54
R11
C30
IC9
IC5
R7
R17
R6
C31
C53
C57
J4
P2
C50
R8
R15
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
IC10
C32
R14
C3
C4
P1
R5
UARTA
C35
IC6
RS-232 driver circuit

fitted on IC21
IC3
C33
P01
J6
NC
UARTB

MTG
DB-9 socket
Signal
1
9
RTS out
CTS in
DTR out
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
DSR in
RXD in
TXD out
+5V DC
MTG
Meaning
TXD
Transmit data
RXD
Receive data
DSR
Data set ready
GND
Ground
DTR
Data terminal ready
CTS
Clear to send
RTS
Request to send
Not used
"uart3:" RS-422 Non Isolated, full duplex (reconfiguration required)

IC23
B
C12
1-971642-01
R24
R23
R22
C60
IC8
C13
IC22
R31
R33 R34
R28
R26
J9 R19
C64
R29
IC7
R25
D1
Z1
C62
J8 A
R20
IC24
C40
R32
P3
J5
K
NC
Z2
C61
C63
F9
C36
RS232: IC21, J6A

RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5 J9*, J10*
C41
IC20
Fit RS-422 driver

circuit on IC22
C42
C34
RS232: IC11, J2A

RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
C3
J2
R13
IC11
IC2
C51
IC13
IC12
R18
R10
R12
R16
R9
IC4
C56
J3
R1
IC1
C52
R3
J1
R2
R4
C55
C54
R11
C30
IC9
IC5
R7
R17
R6
C31
C53
C57
J4
P2
C50
R8
R15
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
IC10
C32
C1
C2
P1
R5
C4
R14
C35
IC6
UARTA
IC3
C33
Remove RS-232 driver

circuit from IC21
P01
R27
R30
R21
J10 R35
J7
NC
Fit straps on
J7 and J8
C10
J6
F14 F10 F15 F11 F16 F12
Move strap from

J6 A to J6 B
IC21
C11
F13
NC
UARTB
Connector Configuration (RS-422 Non-isolated on "uart3:")

DB-9 socket
Signal
1
9
-TXD
-RXD
8
7
6
186
5
3
2
1

overload, short-circuit protected) if strap is moved from
J6 B to J6 A.
GND
+RXD
+TXD
+5V (0.5 A)
Meaning
+TXD
+Transmit data
+RXD
+Receive data
GNDE
-RXD
-Receive data
-TXD
-Transmit data
Ground
"uart3:" 20 mA Current Loop (reconfiguration required)

Remove strap from J6 A
IC23
B
C12
1-971642-01
R24
R23
R22
C60
IC8
C13
IC22
R31
R33 R34
R28
R26
NC
J9 R19
C64
R29
IC7
R25
D1
Z1
C62
J8 A
R20
IC24
C40
R32
P3
J5
K
NC
Z2
C61
C63
C36
RS232: IC21, J6A

RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5 J9*, J10*
C41
IC20
Fit optocouplers
on IC23 and IC24
C42
C34
RS232: IC11, J2A

RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
C35
C3
C4
P1
IC2
IC3
IC10
C33
Remove RS-232 driver

circuit from IC21
P01
R27
R30
R21
J10 R35
J7
F9
Fit strap on J9
if printer is transmitter:
A + C = active
B = passive
C10
J6
F14 F10 F15 F11 F16 F12
Fit strap on J10

if printer is receiver:
A + C = active
B = passive
IC21
C11
F13
NC
UARTB
C51
J2
C1
C2
A
R13
IC11
IC13
IC12
R8
R18
R10
R12
R16
R9
IC4
C56
J3
R1
IC1
R3
J1
R2
R4
C55
C54
R11
C30
IC9
IC5
R7
R17
R6
C31
C53
C57
J4
C52
F1 F6 F2 F7 F3 F8 F4 F5
R15
P2
C50
R5
R14
IC6
UARTA
C32
Fit strap on J5
Connector Configuration (20 mA Current Loop on "uart3:")

MTG
9
-TXD
-RXD
8
7
6
DB-9 socket
Signal
External +5VDC max 500 mA (automatic switch-off

at overload, short-circuit protected) provided a strap is
fitted on J6 A which spoils the galvanic isolation.
5
4
3
2
1
+RXD
+TXD
+5V DC
if GND strap
fitted
MTG
Meaning
+TXD
+Transmit data
+RXD
+Receive data
GNDE
-RXD
-Receive data
-TXD
-Transmit data
Ground
Note: Max. recommended baud rate 9600.
Components
C60
IC8
R21
R25
R28 R29
K
IC24
NC
R32
R19
R26
R22
C62
IC7
R23
C61
C63
J10
NC
Z2
IC21
Z1
J5
C36
RS232: IC21, J6A

RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5 J9*, J10*
C40
C64
R20
IC20
C41
F14
C13
C12
C10
IC22
R33
J9
J8
F10
C34
RS232: IC11, J2A

RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
C42
P1
1
35
68
IC2
34
F9
R34
R31
F15
NC
J7
F11
P3
C11
R35
F12
F16
IC23
R27
R30
F13
R24
B A
J6
D1
UARTB
C4
C3
C2
C1
C33
C35
IC3
C51
C50
R5
B A
J2
R13
R8
R18
R10
C56
F5
R15
F4
R12
C53
C31
IC4
R6
R1
R7
R16
R17
IC6
R2
R3
C52
IC1
J1
R4
R11
C55
IC12
C54
IC5
C30
IC9
IC13
F1
F6
F2
C57
IC11
J3
J4
F3
F8
R9
F7
P2
C32
IC10
R14
UARTA
1-971642-26 Serial/Industrial Interface Board; Component side

188
P1
1
35
2
36
3
37
4
38
5
39
6
40
7
41
8
42
9
43
10
44
11
45
12
46
13
47
14
48
15
49
16
50
17
51
18
52
19
53
20
54
21
55
22
56
23
57
24
58
25
59
26
60
27
61
28
62
29
63
30
64
31
65
32
66
33
67
34
68
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
SCL
SA1
RESET_N
CS_N
INT_N
SDA
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
WR_N
RD_N
5V
11
12
WAIT_N
R1
1
2
3
4
R2
INTA
INTB
9
10
C50 +
A0
VCC
WP
A1
A2
SCL
GND SDA
IC1
R3
4
5
1
2
1
2
9
10
3.3V
RESET_N
A<12..1>
D<15..0>
8
7
6
5
INT_N
CSB_N
CSA_N
3 RESET
3
GND
IC2
CLK
VIN VOUT
3.3V
1.8432MHZ
1 NC/EN_N OUT 3
GND
5V
3.3V
D5
D6
D7
RCLK
IC10
SIN
NC
SOUT
16C550
CS0
CS1
CS2*
BAUDOUT*
IC3
VCC
3.3V
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57
5V
AHC86
IC5
=1
VCC=3.3V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC86
IC5
=1
VCC=3.3V
5
6
7
3.3V
+24VI
4
3
2
1
0
R5
MR
OUT1*
DTR*
RTS*
OUT2*
NC
INTRPT
RXRDY*
A0
A1
A2
6
5
4
3
2
1
44
43
42
41
40
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
NC
VCC
RI*
DCD*
DSR*
CTS*
XIN
XOUT
WR1*
WR2
VSS
NC
RD1*
RD2
DDIS
TXRDY*
ADS*
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
1
2
3
INTA
RESET
12
13
5V
11
9
10
RS485
4
5
1
2
11
65
IC6
=1
VCC=5V
AHC32
IC4
VCC=3.3V
AHC86
IC5
=1
VCC=3.3V
=1
AHCT86
IC6
VCC=5V
AHC86
IC5
=1
VCC=3.3V
12
13
11
RXDA
12
13
R4
TXDA
DTRA_N
RTSA_N
CTSA_N
DSRA_N
DCDA_N
R6
5V
3.3V
AHCT86
IC6
=1
1
2
VCC=5V
J1
AHCT86
IC6
=1
VCC=5V
AHCT86
UARTA CONFIGURATION
RS232: IC11, J2A
RS422: IC12, J3, J4
RS485: IC13, J1, J4*
*: IF END OF CABLE
C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36
3.3V
18
19
WR_N 20
21
22
23
RD_N 24
25
26
27
28
1
485_DIR
5V
R10
C2
C1
R11
R9
R7
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
MAX1480
VCC1
AC1
VCC2
AC2
D1
IVCC1
D2
B
GND1
IRCDRV
FS
A
SD
IDIIN
VCC3
IDEIN
DI
ICOM1
VCC4
IDIDRV
DE
IVCC2
GND2
IDEDRV
RO_N
ICOM2
VCC5
IRLED
IC13
RS485
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
23
16
9
11
15
8
2
1
24
20
5V
MAX1490
VCC1
AC1
VCC2
AC2
D1
IVCC1
D2
IRCDRV
GND1
A
FS
B
Z
SD
VCC3
Y
DI
ICOM1
VCC4
IDIDRV
RO
IVCC2
GND2
IRLED
IC12
RS422
VCC
V+
VGND
T1OUT
T2OUT
T3OUT
T4OUT
R1IN
R2IN
R3IN
R4IN
IC11
MAX238
RS232
10 C1+
12 C113 C2+
14 C25 T1IN
18 T2IN
19 T3IN
21 T4IN
67 R1OUT
43 R2OUT
22 R3OUT
17 R4OUT
R8
R18
OVERCURRENT_N
5V_EXT_EN_N
5V
IC9
GND
IN
IN
EN_N
OUT
OUT
OUT
OC_N
R14
R13
R12
C4
POWER_SWITCH
C3
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
SWITCH FOR
EXTERNAL 5V
R15
R17
R16
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
5V_EXT
1
2
1
2
TERM.TRA.
J4
J3
TERM.REC.
1 A J2
2B
3
GND-SHIELD
9
MTG1
MTG2
RS232
1 +5V
2 TXD
3 RXD
4 DSR
5 GND
6 DTR
7 CTS
8 RTS
P2
-RXD
-TXD
GNDE
+TXD
+RXD
-DATA
GNDE
+DATA
RS485
9PIN DSUB
RS422
Schematics "uart2:"
1-971642-26 Double Serial Interface Board; Schematics 1
RESET
INTB
RD_N
WR_N
CLK
CSB_N
A<12..1>
D<15..0>
5
6
7
C60
5V
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
3.3V
4
3
2
1
0
3.3V
C61
D5
D6
D7
RCLK
IC20
SIN
NC
SOUT
16C550
CS0
CS1
CS2*
BAUDOUT*
C62
C64
C40
C41
C42
1
2
3
AHC86
IC7
=1
VCC=3.3V
11
CL_EN_N
12
13
=1
AHCT32
IC8
VCC=5V
AHCT32
IC8
VCC=5V
AHC86
IC7
=1
VCC=3.3V
AHC86
IC7
VCC=3.3V
AHCT32
IC8
VCC=5V
AHCT32
IC8
VCC=5V
AHC86
IC7
=1
VCC=3.3V
1
2
20MACL
J5
4
5
1
2
65
32
9
10
UARTB CONFIGURATION
RS232: IC21, J6A
RS422: IC22, J6B, J7, J8
20MACL: IC23, IC24, J5, J9*, J10*
C63
12
13
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
3.3V
MR
OUT1*
DTR*
RTS*
OUT2*
NC
INTRPT
RXRDY*
A0
A1
A2
6
5
4
3
2
1
44
43
42
41
40
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
NC
VCC
RI*
DCD*
DSR*
CTS*
XIN
XOUT
WR1*
WR2
VSS
NC
RD1*
RD2
DDIS
TXRDY*
ADS*
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
11
9
10
3.3V
R20
TXDB
RXDB
DTRB_N
RTSB_N
CTSB_N
DSRB_N
DCDB_N
R21
5V
R26
R25
C11
C10
R22
5V
5V
RS232
7
6
5
R27
1
2
3
4
6N139
IC24
6N139
IC23
20MACL
DS2981
VCC
DORO
DO+
DI
RIGND
RI+
IC22
RS422
7
6
5
5
6
7
8
VCC
V+
VGND
T1OUT
T2OUT
T3OUT
T4OUT
R1IN
R2IN
R3IN
R4IN
IC21
MAX238
10 C1+
12 C113 C2+
14 C25 T1IN
18 T2IN
19 T3IN
21 T4IN
67 R1OUT
43 R2OUT
22 R3OUT
17 R4OUT
R23
R24
D1
23
16
9
11
15
8
2
1
24
20
5V
R29
+24VI
R28
R30
C12
C13
R35
R34
R33
R19
F9
Z1
10V
Z2
10V
R32
R31
F16
F15
F14
F13
F12
F11
F10
5V_EXT
C
A
C
190
A
5V
CURR-FEED
TRANSM.
CURR-FEED
RECEIVER
J10
1 A
2 B
3 C
4
TERM.TRA.
J8
TERM.REC.
J7
J9
1 A
2 B
3 C
4
1
2
1
2
1 A J6
2B
3
GND-SHIELD
9
MTG1
MTG2
RS232
1 +5V
2 TXD
3 RXD
4 DSR
5 GND
6 DTR
7 CTS
8 RTS
P3
-RXD
-TXD
GNDE
+TXD
+RXD
RXDOUT
TXDOUT
TXDIN
RXDIN
20MACL
9PIN DSUB
RS422
Schematics "uart3:"
1-971642-26 Double Serial Interface Board; Schematics 2
14.8 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Board

Description
The IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Board is an optional device for
EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial. It provides
these printers with one parallel interface port and is supported by both
Fingerprint and IPL.
The parallel communication port is addressed in Intermec Fingerprint as
device centronics: (communication channel 4). The board is IEEE1284-I
compatible. Nibble, byte, ECP, and EPP modes from printer to host are
not presently supported.
The IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface kit contains:

One Parallel Interface Board

One Installations Instructions booklet.
There are neither any straps nor any other types of physical configuration
on this interface board, nor any options in the Setup Mode.
IEEE 1284 interface
The IEEE 1284 board has a standard 36pin IEEE 1284 B socket with the
following configuration:
192
Pin
Signal
DSTROBE
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
10
ACK
11
BUSY
12
PE
13
SELECT
14
AF
15
N/C
16
GND
17
SCREEN
18
19
GND
20
GND
20
GND
21
GND
22
GND
23
GND
24
GND
25
GND
26
GND
27
GND
28
GND
29
GND
30
GND
31
INIT
32
ERROR
33
N/C
34
N/C
35
N/C
36
SELECTIN
Remark
External +5VDC max 500 mA (automatic switchoff at overload, short-circuit protected)
Components
1-971641-02
P01
F18
F17
F16
F15
F14
F13
F12
F11
F10
F8
R17
R16
R11
R10
R15
R14
R13
R12
R8
F7
R7
F6
R6
R18
F5
R5
IC5
F4
R4
F3
C1
C2
R2
C13
P3
R1
F9
R9
P1
IC3
F1
R19
R3
F2
D1
C9
F19
C3
C11
C8
IC1
IC4
C5
C10
C14
IC6
C4
C7
R21
R22
C12
IC2
R20
C6
1-971641-27 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Board; Component side

P1
1
35
2
36
3
37
4
38
5
39
6
40
7
41
8
42
9
43
10
44
11
45
12
46
13
47
14
48
15
49
16
50
17
51
18
52
19
53
20
54
21
55
22
56
23
57
24
58
25
59
26
60
27
61
28
62
29
63
30
64
31
65
32
66
33
67
34
68
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
SCL
SA1
RESET_N
CS_N
INT_N
SDA
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
WR_N
RD_N
5V
WAIT_N
R20
1
2
3
4
IC2
R22
CS_N 2
WR_N 14
A0
VCC
A1
WP
A2
SCL
GND SDA
R21
A<12..1>
D<15..0>
8
7
6
5
5V
INT_N
CS_N
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9
8
+ C14
5V
RESET_N
OSC.
NC/EN_N OUT
GND
AHC1G32
IC6
VCC=3.3V
IC4
VCC
3.3V
VCC6
PROG_N
IO49
IO50/GCK5
IO51
IO52
IO53
IO54
IO55
IO56
IO57
IO58
VCC7
GND7
IO59
IO60
IO61
IO62
IO63
IO64
IO65
IO66/DIN
IO67/DOUT
CCLK
VCC8
IC3
32 VIN
3.3V
C11 C12 C13
GND
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
XCS05XL-4
IC1
C1
C2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5V
C3
C4
C5
WR_N
RD_N
WAIT_N
5
4
3
2
1
0
24
C6
C7
C8
C9
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C10
3.3V
VCC4
M0
GND4
M1
GCK2/IO28
IO27
IO26
IO25
IO24
IO23
IO22
IO21
IO20
VCC3
GND3
IO19
IO18
IO17
IO16
TMS/IO15
TCK/IO14
TDI/IO13
IO12
GCK1/IO11
GND2
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
DONE
GND6
GCK4/IO48
IO47
IO46
IO45
IO44
IO43
IO42
IO41
IO40
IO39
GND5
VCC5
INIT_N/IO38
IO37
IO36
IO35
IO34
IO33
IO32
IO31
IO30
GCK3/IO29
PWRDWN_N
O/TDO
GND8
IO68
IO69/GCK7
IO70/CS1
IO71
IO72
IO73
IO74
IO75
IO76
IO77
GND1
VCC1
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
IO6
IO7
IO8
IO9
IO10/GCK8
VCC2
194
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
D1
OVERCURRENT_N
5V_EXT_EN_N
R19
5V
1
2
3
4
OUT
OUT
OUT
OC_N
MAX1607
GND
IN
IN
EN_N
POWER_SWITCH
IC5
8
7
6
5
R18
3.3V
R9 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R12 R13 R14 R15 R10 R11 R16 R17
ACK
BUSY
PERROR
SELECT
AFEED
INIT
ERROR
SELIN
STROBE
CD0
CD1
CD2
CD3
CD4
CD5
CD6
CD7
3.3V
5V
F19
F18
F17
F16
F15
F14
F13
F12
F11
F10
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
F9
MTG2
MTG1
BR3
MTG2
MTG1
BR2
MTG2
MTG1
BR1
P3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
EXT-5V
SELIN
SCREEN
GND
STROBE
GND
DATA0
GND
DATA1
GND
DATA2
GND
DATA3
GND
DATA4
GND
DATA5
GND
DATA6
GND
DATA7
GND
ACK
GND
BUSY
GND
PERROR
GND
SELECT
INIT
AFEED
ERROR
1
19
2
20
3
21
4
22
5
23
6
24
7
25
8
26
9
27
10
28
11
29
12
30
13
31
14
32
15
33
16
34
17
35
18
36
CABLE ASSEMBLY
40-PIN RIBBON CABLE
CONNECTOR -> 36-PIN
CENTRONICS CONN.
40-PIN 36-PIN
Schematics
1-971641-27 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Board; Schematics
14.9 EasyLAN Ethernet Interface Board

Description
This section describes how to install an EasyLAN Ethernet network
interface in an EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, or PF4i Compact Industrial printer
and how to connect it to a 100base TX Fast LAN, WAN, Intranet, or
Internet network via a wired connection.
The installation instructions describes how to physically install the
interface board in a printer. Configuration and setup are described in the
EasyLAN Interface Kit, Installation Instructions and the Intermec EasyLAN,
Users Guide on the attached CD-ROM.
Printer Firmware
The printer must either be fitted with Intermec Fingerprint v8.00 (or
later) or IPL v2.00 (or later). In Intermec Fingerprint, the network port is
addressed as device "net1:" (communication channel #5).
Installation Kit
The EasyLAN kit contains:
One EasyLAN interface board
One light guide
One hexagonal threaded spacer
One network extension cable
One cable tie
One serial number label
One CD-ROM with software and manuals
The only tool required for the installation is a #T20 Torx screwdriver.
Installation Instructions
Also see illustration on the next page.
1 Switch off the printer and disconnect the power cord.
2 Disconnect all communication cables.
4 Remove the LAN connector plug, which is snap-locked at the top of the
rear plate.
LAN connector plug
5 Remove the #T20 Torx screw that holds the upper/front part of the
CPU board to the power supply unit and replace it with the hexagonal
spacer included in the kit. Keep the screw.
6 Connect the EasyLAN board to the PCI connector (J84) on the CPU
board so the hole in the interface board becomes aligned with the spacer.
7 Secure the EasyLAN board with the #T20 Torx screw you previously
removed.
8 From the inside of the electronics compartment, press the metal socket
of the network extension cable into the square hole in the rear plate
(where you removed the LAN plug) until it is held by its snaplock.
9 Route the extension cable over the SIMMs on the CPU board and
connect it to the RJ-45 socket on the EasyLAN interface board (J2).
10 From the outside, insert the thin end of the light guide through the
small hole next to the RJ-45 socket on the rear plate. Press the clear
plastic lamp in place. Connect the other end to the black plastic
socket (D1) on the EasyLAN interface board.
11 Pull the cable tie through the hole in the upper edge of the CPU board
between the SIMMs and the RTC socket. Secure both the extension
cable and the light guide with the cable tie.
12 Fit the serial number label on the rear plate below the RJ-45 socket and
to the right of the memory card slot.
13 Put back the front/left-hand cover. Route the cable from the display unit
above the ribbon motor (if any). Connect the cable to connector J50 at
the upper front corner of the CPU board.
15 Enter the Setup Mode and print the test label Hardware Info in
Fingerprint or HW in IPL to see if the printer detects the EasyLAN
Interface board. For information on how to enter the Setup Mode and
print test labels, refer to the Users Guide for the printer in question.
16 After startup, enter the Setup Mode to set up the network parameters.
See Appendix A. Setting the network parameters in IPL, when the server
does not support DHCP or BOOTP, is described in EasyLAN Interface
Kit, Installation Instructions.
196
Network extension cable
Cable tie
Light guide
Optional interface board

(Serial/Industrial,
Double Serial, or
IEEE 1284 Parallel)
CPU board
Screw and spacer
EasyLAN Ethernet interface

board
RJ-45 Ethernet
connector
Serial number label
Components
J2
Y2
C4
D1
C26
C5
R1
C15
C27
C28
C14
R9
C23
R11
C29
R7
R8
C22
IC2
R4
C24
C31
R6
C30
C6
C25
L3
L2
C34
M1
R5
C17
C39
C33
C7
R12
R13
C20
C21
C11
C10
IC1
L1
C16
R2
R3
C36
C37
C38
C35
C19
C32
Y1
C18
C3
IC3
C1
C13
C2
C12
1-971645-26 EasyLAN Interface Board; Component side
J1
1-971645-26 EasyLAN Interface Board; Soldering side

198
C1
5V
5V
R3
32.768MHZ
OUT
EN/NC
GND
IC3
GND
R2
VCC
Y1
3.3V
J1
C2
C3
3.3V
AC RETURN PATHS
FOR PCI SIGNALS
CROSSING 5V TO 3.3V
BOUNDARY
VIN VOUT
C38
C37
C36
26
27
29
21
22
16
18
3.3V
C35
PCI_REQ_N
PCI_GNT_N
PCI_INT_N
PCI_CBE3_N
PCI_CBE2_N
PCI_STOP_N
PCI_TRDY_N
14
15
8
9
11
28
30
31
23
24
25
17
19
20
10
12
13
1
2
C10
C6
C4
PCI_CLK2
C11
C7
28
27
26
31
30
29
PCI_CLK2
PCI_INT_N
PCI_RST_N
PCI_GNT_N
PCI_REQ_N
TPTDM
TPTDP
TPRDM
TPRDP
RXAVDD
REGEN
R4
RXAVDD
R4=9K31 FOR
DP83815 AND
R4=10K FOR
DP83816
56/58
33
21
PINS
IC1
PINS
3.3V
C14
C13
C18
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
C19
C22
137
C20
RXAVDD
C32
Y1
C23
L1
3.3V
SUBGND1/NC83816
VSS_38
AUXVDD_39
VREF
RESERVED_41
NC_42
NC_43
VSS_44
TPRDM
TPRDP
AUXVDD_47
REGEN
VSS_49
RESERVED_50
VSS_51
VSS_52
TPTDM
TPTDP
VSS_55
AUXVDD_56
VSS_57
AUXVDD_58
PMEN/CLKRUN_N
PCICLK
INTA_N
RST_N
GNT_N
REQ_N
VSS_65
AD31
AD30
AD29
PCIVDD_69
AD28
AD27
AD26
IC2
C21
85 125
PINS
C15
27
IC1
C16
69/80 94/107 117
3.3V
IC1
BYPASS CAPACITORS
PCI_RST_N
PCI_CLK1
PCI_DEVS_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_FRAME_N
PCI_CBE1_N
PCI_SERR_N
PCI_PERR_N
PCI_CBE0_N
C12
C5
PCI_CLK1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
3.3V
PCI_AD1
PCI_AD2
VCC1
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD7
PCI_CBE_N0
VCC2
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD13
VCC3
PCI_CBE_N1
PCI_SERR_N
PCI_PERR_N
VCC4
PCI_DEVSEL_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_FRAME_N
VCC5
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD20
VCC6
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD25
VCC7
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD31
VCC8
PCI_CLK
PCI_REQ_N2
PCI_RST_N
VCC9
NC1
SCL
SDA
PCI_DET_N
24V
PCI_CBE3_N
SCA80
25
24
PCI_AD0
VSS1
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD4
7
PCI_AD6
VSS2
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD11
VSS3
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD15
PCI_PAR
VSS4
PCI_LOCK_N
PCI_STOP_N
PCI_TRDY_N
VSS5
PCI_CBE_N2
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD18
VSS6
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD22
PCI_CBE_N3
VSS7
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD29
VSS8
PCI_REQ_N0
PCI_GNT_N0
PCI_INT_N
VSS9
TCK
TMS
TDO
VSS10
TDI
TRST_N
C24
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Y2
25MHZ
IC1
TQFP144
DP83815/6
R1
C26
R1=0OHM
ONLY POPULATED
FOR DP83815
3.3V
PIN19
C25 +
23
22
3
4
6
21
20
19
C17
C27
PCI_CBE2_N
5V
L3
18
17
16
L2
PCI_FRAME_N
PCI_IRDY_N
PCI_TRDY_N
C28
TPRDP
TPRDM
TPTDP
RXAVDD
TPTDM
R8
R7
R6
R5
C29
C30
MA2/LED100_N
MA1/LED10_N
MA0/LEDACT_N
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4/EEDO
AUXVDD_137
VSS_136
MD3
MD2
MD1/CFGDIS_N
MD0
MWR_N
MRD_N
MCS_N
EESEL
RESERVED_127
SUBGND3/NC83816
MACVDD2/NC83816
MACVSS2/NC83816
PWRGOOD
3VAUX
AD0
AD1
AD2
AD3
PCIVDD_117
AD4
AD5
VSS_114
AD6
AD7
CBEN0
AD8
AD9
RD+
RDCT
TD+
NC1
NC2
RD-
TDCT
TD-
8
9
6
7
4
5
0
1
2
3
M1
R9
IC2
R11
TX-
RX+
RXCT
TX+
NC4
NC3
RX-
TXCT
8
4
5
VCC
DO
GND
REGEN
C39
3.3V
10 R13
14
13
12
11
15 R12
RX+
RX-
TX+
TX-
C33
RJ45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MTG1
MTG2
MTG3
MTG4
J2
NORMALLY UNPOPULATED
C34
16
3.3V
D1
C39 ONLY POPULATED

FOR DP83816
CS EEPROM
SK
DI
ORG/NC
NC
PCI_CBE0_N
1
2
3
6
7
1CT:1CT
NORMALLY
UNPOPULATED
C31
3
4
5
6
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
3.3V
1
3
L2+C17 ONLY POPULATED

FOR DP83815
PCI_DEVS_N
PCI_STOP_N
PCI_PERR_N
PCI_SERR_N
PCI_PAR
PCI_CBE1_N
3.3V
15
14
PCI_PAR
PIN19
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FXVDD/NC83816
VSS_35
NC_34
AUXVDD_33
VSS_32
TXCLK
TXEN
CRS
COL/MA16
AUXVDD_27
VSS_26
TXD3/MA15
TXD2/MA14
TXD1/MA13
TXD0/MA12
AUXVDD_21
VSS_20
C1
X2
X1
VSS_16
RXDV/MA11
RXER/MA10
RXOE
RXD3/MA9
RXD2/MA8
RXD1/MA7
AUXVDD_9
VSS_8
RXD0/MA6
RXCLK
MDC
MDIO
MA5
MA4/EECLK
MA3/EEDI
AD25
AD24
CBEN3
IDSEL
VSS_77
AD23
AD22
PCIVDD_80
AD21
AD20
AD19
VSSIO4/NC83816
VDDIO4/NC83816
AD18
AD17
AD16
CBEN2
VSS_90
FRAME_N
IRDY_N
TRDY_N
PCIVDD_94
DEVSEL_N
STOP_N
PERR_N
SERR_N
PAR
CBEN1
AD15
AD14
VSS_103
AD13
AD12
AD11
PCIVDD_107
AD10
13
12
11
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
10
2
4
PCI_AD(31..0)
RX-
TX+
TXRX+
Schematics
1-971645-26 EasyLAN Interface Board; Schematics
14.10 EasyLAN Wireless Interface Board

Description
This section describes how to install an EasyLAN Wireless network
interface in an EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, or PF4i Compact Industrial printer
and how to connect it to a LAN, WAN, Intranet, or Internet network via a
wireless connection.
The installation instructions describes how to physically install the
interface board in a printer. Configuration and setup are described in the
EasyLAN Wireless Kit, Installation Instructions and the Intermec EasyLAN,
Users Guide on the attached CD-ROM.
Printer Firmware
The printer must either be fitted with Intermec Fingerprint v8.10 (or
later) or IPL v2.10 (or later). In Intermec Fingerprint, the network port is
addressed as device "net1:" (communication channel #5).
Installation Kit
The EasyLAN Interface Kit contains:
One EasyLAN adapter board complete with radio module fitted
Rear plate (for EasyCoder PF2/4i-series printers only)
RJ-45 plug (for EasyCoder PM4i only)
One light guide
One hexagonal threaded spacer
One antenna extension cable
One antenna
One cable clip
One cable tie
One CD-ROM with software and manuals
This Installation Instruction booklet
The only tools required for the installation are #T10 and #T20 Torx
screwdrivers and a small wrench.
200
Installation Instructions
1 Switch off the printer and disconnect the power cord.
2 Disconnect all communication cables.
4 Remove any optional interface board or blind cover plate fitted on the
rear plate.
5 Remove any present EasyLAN Ethernet interface installed in the printer
including cables etc.
6 Remove the present rear plate like this:
- Loosen but do not remove the two #T20 Torx screws that hold the
rear plate and the #T20 Torx screw that holds the rear bottom corner
of the CPU board.
- Carefully manipulate the rear plate out of the groove in the chassis.
Allow the CPU board to flex a little to be able to get the connectors
out of their slots.
7 Install the rear plate included in the kit in reverse order and tighten all
three screws.
8 Reinstall any optional interface board or blind cover plate previously
removed.
9 Connect the antenna cable to the radio module, which is factory-fitted
on the EasyLAN adapter board, as illustrated below. Support the upper
edge of the radio module with a finger while connecting the cable.
Adapter board
Connect antenna
cable here
Radio module
10 Remove the #T20 Torx screw that holds the upper/front part of the
CPU board to the power supply unit and replace it with the hexagonal
spacer included in the kit. Keep the screw.
11 Connect the EasyLAN adapter board to the PCI connector (J84) on the
CPU board so the hole in the board becomes aligned with the spacer
and secure the board with the #T20 Torx screw.
12 Route the antenna cable over the SIMMs on the CPU board towards
the rear plate and secure it using the cable clips included in the kit.
One clip is factory-fitted on the EasyLAN adapter board and the
other should be fitted in the small hole at the top of the CPU board
immediately to the rear of the memory SIMM sockets.
201
13 From the inside of the electronics compartment, insert the antenna

connector through the round hole in the rear plate and lock it with the
washer and nut on the outside.
14 Fit the antenna to the connector of the antenna cable and bend the
hinge so the antenna points straight up.
15 From the outside, insert the thin end of the light guide through the
small hole next to the antenna on the rear plate. Press the clear plastic
lamp in place. Connect the other end to the black plastic socket (D1)
at the top of the EasyLAN adapter board. Secure it with the cable tie
through the hole at the upper edge of the CPU board.
16 Put back the front/left-hand cover. Route the cable from the display unit
above the ribbon motor (if any). Connect the cable to connector J50 at
the upper front corner of the CPU board.
18 Enter the Setup Mode and print the test label Hardware Info in
Fingerprint or HW in IPL to see if the printer detects the EasyLAN
Wireless interface board. For information on how to enter the Setup
Mode and print test labels, refer to the Users Guide for the printer in
question.
19 Set up the network parameters. There are several methods:
- Connect the printer and a PC and run the EasyLAN Network Setup
wizard, which can be found on the attched CD-ROM. Requires a PC
running Windows 98 or later.
- Insert a CompactFlash Card containing a configuration file in the
printer and start it up. Configuration Compact Flash cards can be
created using the EasyLAN Network Setup wizard on the attached
CD-ROM.
- Fingerprint:
Establish an RS-232 communication with the printer and set it up
using Fingerprint setup strings or setup files. IP address, netmask,
default router, and name server can also be set using the printers
built-in keyboard. Only requirement on the PC side is a terminal
program that can transmit and receive ASCII characters on an RS232 line. See EasyLAN Wireless Kit, Installation Instructions.
- IPL:
Establish an RS-232 communication with the printer and set it up
using IPL commands. Only requirement on the PC side is a terminal
program that can transmit and receive ASCII characters on an RS232 line. Select the method of obtaining IP address, netmask, default
router, and name server automatically from the server using the
printers built-in keyboard. This requires a server that supports DHCP
and/or BOOTP. See EasyLAN Wireless Kit, Installation Instructions.
202
Cable tie
Antenna
cable
Light guide
Cable clips
#T20 Torx screw

and spacer
EasyLAN
adapter board
Antenna
Antenna
(packed separately when the EasyLAN Wireless
interface is factory-installed)
203
Components
C11
C12
R28
R26
C5
C1
R22
R23
R25
R24
IC2
R27
R19
R18
R20
R21
R30
R29
R5
R9
R4
R8
R6
R7
D1
C2
J1
C6
C9
C10
Y1
IC1
R1
R2
C7
C3
C4
C8
4
3
124
J2
123
L1
2
1
R17
R11
R16
R12
R15
R14
R13
Primary Side
Secondary Side
1-971646-26 Adapter Board
204
Schematics
PRINTER PCI INTERFACE
MINI-PCI INTERFACE
PC I_AD (31..0
)
5V
0
3
4
6
8
9
11
14
15
PAR
ST OP_N
TRDY _N
CB E2_N
16
18
21
22
CB E3_N
26
27
29
RE Q _N
GN T_N
INT_N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
PC I_AD 0
PC I_AD 1
VSS1
PC I_AD 2
VCC1
PC I_AD 3
PC I_AD 5
PC I_AD 4
PC I_AD 6
PC I_AD 7
PC I_C BE_N0
VSS2
PC I_AD 8
VCC2
PC I_AD 9
PC I_AD 10
PC I_AD 11
PC I_AD 12
VSS3
PC I_AD 13
VCC3
PC I_AD 14
PC I_AD 15
PC I_C BE_N1
PC I_PAR
PC I_SER R_N
VSS4
PC I_PER R_N
PC I_LO C K_N
VCC4
PC I_STO P_N
PC I_D EVSEL _N
PC I_TRD Y_N
PC I_IRD Y_N
J1
VSS5
PC I_C BE_N2
PC I_AD 16
PC I_AD 18
PC I_FRAM E_N
VC C 5
PC I_AD 17
PC I_AD 19
VSS6
PC I_AD 20
PC I_AD 21
VC C 6
PC I_AD 22
PC I_AD 23
PC I_C BE_N3
PC I_AD 24
VSS7
PC I_AD 25
PC I_AD 26
VC C 7
PC I_AD 27
PC I_AD 28
PC I_AD 29
PC I_AD 30
VSS8
PC I_AD 31
PC I_REQ _N0
VC C 8
PC I_G NT_N0
PC I_C LK
PC I_INT_N
PC I_REQ _N2
VSS9
PC I_RST_N
TC K
VCC9
TM S
NC1
TD O
SC L
VSS1 0
SD A
TD I
PC I_D ET_N
TR ST_N
24V
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
3.3V
1
2
5
7
J2
CB E0_N
10
12
13
LED1_G RNP
LED1_G RNN
CB E1_N
SER R _N
PER R _N
D EVSEL_N
IRDY_N
FRA M E_N
CLK2
RE Q _N
17
19
20
31
29
23
24
25
27
25
CB E3_N
28
30
31
23
CLK1
21
19
RS T_N
17
CB E2_N
IRDY_N
CLKR UN_ N
SER R _N
PER R _N
C BE1_N
14
12
10
C1
C2
IC1
VIN
5V
VO U T
C3
GN D
3
1
AC RE TU RN PATH S
FOR PC I SIGN ALS
CRO SSING 5V TO 3.3V
BO UNDA RY
4
VC C
C10
AC _BIT_CLK
AC _CO D EC _ID1_N
C5
C6
Y1
32.768MHZ
EN /NC
OU T
GN D
R1
CLK1
R2
CLK2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
LED 2_YELP
LED 2_YELN
5V
INT_N
RS T_N
GN T_N
30
28
26
24
11
22
20
PAR
18
16
FRA M E_N
TRDY _N
ST OP_N
D EVSEL_N
15
13
11
9
CB E0_N
6
4
2
0
AC _SDA TA_O UT
AC _CO D EC _ID0_N
AC _RESET _N
MT G 1
MTG 2
C7
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
C8
AC _SYN C
3.3V
5V
3.3V
C9
C4
8
7
3.3V
5V
3.3V
LED BLINK O N E-SH O T CIRCUIT

LED _LIN KP
3.3V
LED1_G RNP
R26
R20
14
R28
15
R21
1
2
3
LED1_G RNN
R22
R26 O R R 27
ON LY
POPU LATED
IF IC2
POPU LATED
R24
LED 2_YELN
R25
D1
G R EEN /YELLO W
C EXT
R EXT /C EXT
13
A
B
CLR
LED _AC TN
LED _LIN KN
R5
R6
ON LY IC 2 O R
R29 O R R 30
POPU LATED
R30
CO LO R SW ITC H
RE SISTO R S
SIN K SID E
R9
VCC=5V ;G ND=G ND
R27
R23
AHCT 123
R8
C11
R19
R4
IC2
R18
R7
LED _LIN KP
LED _AC TP
5V
LED 2_YELP
LED _AC TP
R29
CO LO R SW ITC H
RE SISTO R S
SO URCE SIDE
LED _AC TN
LED _LIN KN
TERM INATION O F U NUS ED

MINI-PC I SIG N ALS
3.3V
AC _CO D EC _ID0_N
R11
AC _CO D EC _ID1_N
R12
CLKR UN_ N
R13
AC _SYN C
R14
AC _BIT_CLK
R15
AC _SDA TA_O UT
R16
AC _RESET _N
R17
DE CO UP LING IC2
U N U SED
5V
C12
PAR T
IC2
6
7
9
DO NO T PO PULA TE
10
L1
11
AHCT 123
C EXT
R EXT /C EXT
5
A
B
CLR
Q
Q
12
VCC=5V;G ND=G ND
1-971646-26 Adapter Board

205
206
15
RFID
This chapter describes the various components included in the RFID kit(s)
currently available for the EasyCoder PF2i printer.
207
Chapter 15RFID
15.1 Replacing Components in Intermec RFID Kits

The various RFID kits available for Intermec printers all contain the
following basic components:
An antenna used to transmit RF signals between the RFID tag and
the reader module. The antenna is mounted in close vicinity to the
printhead, and is connected to the reader with a cable that runs from the
media compartment to the electronics compartment via a cavity in the
center deck.
A reader module with RF transceiver that generates radio frequency
signals and receives RF transmissions from the RFID tag. Depending on
which reader type is used in the kit, the reader is mounted either directly
on the I/O board or on a separate bracket assembly in the electronics
compartment.
An RFID I/O board which handles communication between the RFID
reader module and the main board. The RFID interface board occupies
one of the slots for optional interfaces at the back of the printer and
features an extra RS-232 serial interface.
Note: The RS-232 interface on the RFID I/O board can only be utilized
in printers running Fingerprint firmware. The interface is referred to as
uart2:, uart3:, etc. depending on which slot is used and what other
optional interfaces are installed.
Replacing the antenna

To prevent damage, handle the radio module delicately and be careful
when attaching or detaching the antenna cable.
Zur Vermeidung von Schden das Funkmodul sorgsam behandeln und
das Antennenkabel nur vorsichtig anbringen bzw. abtrennen.
The antenna is part of the media guide assembly which also includes the
media guide and the antenna cable. All these components must be replaced
in order to replace the antenna.
To replace the antenna
1 Disconnect the power cord and open the electronics compartment, see
Section 3.2.
2 Detach the antenna cable from the radio module.
208
Chapter 15RFID
3 Carefully lift the upper media guide, and remove the edge guide, the
outer guide and the media guide from the shaft.
Upper media guide

Media guide
Outer guide
Edge guide
4 Pull the antenna cable out of the opening in the center deck.
5 Install the new antenna in reverse order.
Replacing the Single or Dual Slot I/O Bus Cable (Flat Cable)
This procedure is described in section 14.5 (Installing an Optional
Interface Board)
Replacing the Radio Module

The radio module is of PC-Card type and is installed directly on the
RFID interface board.
To replace the radio module
1 Disconnect the power cord and open the electronics compartment, see
Section 3.2.
2 Remove the Flash SIMMs from the main board.
3 Remove the old radio module, and slide the new one in place. The label
should be facing outward.
4 Put back the Flash SIMMs in their sockets.
5 Make sure jumpers J5-J9 are set to their correct position (modifying
jumper positions is not necessary if, for example, a faulty unit is
replaced with a unit of the same model). For IM3/IM4 radio modules,
the jumpers should be set to the upper position.
6 Put back the cover over the electronics compartment.
Upgrading the Radio Modules Firmware

Note: This upgrade procedure applies only to the IM4 RFID module.
In this procedure, you will use FTP to transfer and install the firmware file
on the printer. Installing the firmware this way requires that the printer is
equipped with an EasyLAN Ethernet card.
209
Chapter 15RFID
To check what firmware version the RFID module is running (Fingerprint)

1 Press Setup.
2 Navigate to PRINTDEFS > TESTPRINT > SETUP INFO.
3 Press Enter. A test label with Setup information prints.
To check what firmware version the RFID module is running (IPL)
1 Press Setup.
2 Navigate to TEST/SERVICE > TESTPRINT > CONFIG > SW.
3 Press Enter. A test label with software information prints.
As new firmware upgrade files become available, they will be published on
the Intermec Support website for download.
To upgrade the firmware
Note: This procedure uses the default admin password pass and refers to
the firmware file as newfx.hex.
1 Connect your printer to the network, turn it on and obtain the printers
IP address.
2 Click Start > Run.
3 Enter FTP + the printers IP address in the field.
Windows connects with the printers FTP server.

4 Log in as administrator.
5 Enter bin.
210
Chapter 15RFID
6 Enter put newfw.hex tmp:newfw.hex.

The firmware upgrade file is now located in the tmp folder in the
printers memory.
7 Type quit to close the program.
The actual upgrade is performed by sending an upgrade command to
the printer, as follows:
8 Connect the printer to your computer with a serial cable.
9 Start a terminal program, for example Windows Hyperterminal and set
it up to communicate with your printer.
For help, see How to use MS HyperTerminal and a serial cable in
Appendix B.
10 (Fingerprint only) Send the following commands to the printer:
Run "su -p pass admin"
RFIDMODULEUPGRADE "tmp:newfw.hex"
(IPL only) Send the following commands to the printer:

<STX><SI>xu,admin,pass<ETX>
<STX><ESC>T;Itmp:newfw.hex;<ETX>
11 Wait for the upgrade process to finish, then restart the printer.
Replacing the RFID Serial Interface Board

Please refer to section 14.5 (Installing an Optional Interface Board) for
information on how to replace this part.
15.2 Verifying RFID functionality

Once a part (or parts) have been replaced, it is important to verify that
the RFID-equipped printer works properly before it is put into active
use. Refer to Section 16.17 for more information on how to troubleshoot
RFID issues.
Recommendations for Printers Running Fingerprint

Turn on the printer and set RFID > ENABLE either via the Setup menu,
the web page or by using the command SETUP "RFID,MODE,ENABLE".
Print an RFID test label to make sure the printer can communicate with
the RFID tag.
To print an RFID test label
1 Load the printer with RFID media.
2 Press Setup.
3 Navigate to PRINT DEFS > TESTPRINT > RFID TEST LABEL.
4 Press Enter. The test label prints.
Recommendations for Printers Running IPL

Turn on the printer and set RFID > ENABLE either via the Setup menu,
the web page or by using the command <STX><SI>J1<ETX>. Raise and
211
Chapter 15RFID
lower the printhead, and then perform a Tagread operation. If successful,

the printer will return the contents of the current RFID tag.
To perform a Tagread
1 Load the printer with RFID media.
2 Press Setup.
3 Navigate to RFID > TAGREAD.
4 Press Enter. The printer reads and returns the content of the current
RFID tag.
212
16
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to diagnose and fix problems that may occur in
an EasyCoder PF-series printer. Some parts are subject to wear and may
need periodical replacement, such as the printhead.
Please note that replacement parts are generally only available as complete
modules (see the Spare Parts Catalog or Spare Parts List).
This chapter is supplemented by the Technical Bulletins that are
distributed as soon as any new problem has been reported and a remedy
has been found.
213
Chapter 16Troubleshooting
16.1 Diagnosing
To diagnose the printer for faults, take steps in the following order:
In case the printer is running the Intermec Fingerprint firmware, use
Intermec Shell to check printers setup and functions. Intermec Shell
can be accessed regardless of any running autoexec.bat files as described
below.
Browse through the remainder of this chapter to find symptoms that
apply to the faulty printer.
Refer to the Printer Technical Bulletins for updated information.
Fingerprint only
The keyboard, display messages, sounds, and other functions will be

custom-configured, if a custom-made program is running in the printer.
Normally, such a program is started at power-up using an autoexec.bat file.
The procedure of starting up Intermec Shell, bypassing any other autoexec.
bat files the printers memory, is called the Test Mode. In fact, the Test
Mode is just a convenient way of accessing Intermec Shell and, via
Intermec Shell, also the Setup Mode.
Note: Any changes done in the Test Mode will remain after leaving the
Test Mode.
Entering Intermec Shell in the Test Mode

Switch off the power.
Raise the printhead.
Press any key on the printers built-in keyboard, with the exception of
<Shift>, and keep on pressing it.
Switch on the power.
The printer will start the initialization procedure.
Release the key.
The printer will start up Intermec Shell.
Press <Enter> before the 5 sec. countdown is completed.
Inside Intermec Shell you have a variety of options, for example:
Enter the Setup Mode to check or change the setup. Before changing
the setup, you should print out or write down the settings so you can
restore them before returning the printer.
Make a printout of the present setup values.
Perform testfeed operations.
Print test labels to check the printout quality.
Reset all setup values to default. Before resetting the setup, you should
print out or write down the settings so you can restore them before
returning the printer.
Enter Intermec Fingerprint, for example to check what files the printers
memory contains or to list files.
214
Restart the printer and leave the Test Mode.

Refer to the Intermec Shell Overview in Appendix 1 or in the Users
Guide.
If the printer works normally in the Test Mode, it is likely that the
malfunction is either due to communication problems, abnormal
conditions at the site of operation, or a custom-made program.
Fingerprint and IPL
Use this short-list to find the symptom that applies to the printer:
Symptom
No reaction at power up
Printer stops working after startup
CPU board failures
Power supply unit failures
Console errors
Error messages
No communication (general)
See
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
No serial communication
16.9
No network communication
16.10
Sensor malfunctions
16.11
- Label stop sensor

- Headlift sensor
- Label taken sensor
- Ribbon end sensor
Printing problems
16.12
- No printout at all
- Overall weak printout
- Weaker printout on either inner or other part of label
- Overall dark printout (bleeding)
- Weak or missing printout of some dots
- Unexpected black printout (completely or partially)
- Only first part of label printed
- Media feed does not work properly
Ribbon problems
16.13
- Transfer ribbon breaks

- Transfer ribbon wrinkles
- No transfer printout
Liner takeup problems
16.14
Memory card problems
16.15
Paper cutter problems
16.16
RFID problems
16.17
215
16.2 No Reaction at Power Up

Description:
There is no visible reaction when the power to the printer is switched on.
The Power LED does not light up.
There is no text in the display window.
Possible Causes and Suggested Remedies:

No power in AC wall socket.
- Check with some other electrical device or a voltage meter.
Power cord connectors not completely inserted in printers power cord
receptacle or in wall socket.
- Disconnect and firmly connect both ends of power cord. Try again.
Faulty power cord.
- Replace and try again.
Cable between CPU board and power supply not properly connected.
- Test as described in Section 16.5 using test points on CPU board (see
Section 13.5).
Power Supply overload.
- Too high a temperature in the power supply unit. Leave the power
on and wait for the power supply to cool off (may take up to half
an hour). When the temperature returns to normal, the printer will
automatically restart. If the error persists, examine the power supply
as described in Section 16.5.
Faulty power supply unit.
- Refer to Section 16.5.
Faulty console unit.
Wrong type of printhead fitted (designed for EasyCoder F-series)
causing a short-circuits because of different cablings.
- Check part number and label on printhead. If wrong type, replace
with a correct one.
- If the printer still refuses to start up, check if fuse F70 on the CPU
board has blown. Normally, this condition is very unlikely to
happen and no harm should be done to either the electronics or the
printhead.
216
16.3 Printer Stops Working after Startup

Description:
The printer stops working after a successful startup.
The Power LED is lit.
The <Feed>, <Setup>, and <Print> keys, work properly.

Communication problems?
- Refer to Sections 16.8-16.10.
Printer malfunction?
- Check if the printer can print test labels in the Test Mode.
Description:
The Power LED is lit.
There is no reaction on software commands.
There is no reaction on any keys on the printers keyboard.

The printers main program has halted due to high external disturbances
from other electrical sources.
- Restart the printer and find out if there are disturbances coming via
the 115/230 VAC supply, via a communication channel, or from
other electrical appliances.
CPU board failures.
Power Supply Unit failures.
Console errors.
Description:
The Power LED is not lit.

Error in the supply of AC power to the printer.
Faulty console, faulty power LED, or faulty cabling between CPU
board and console.
217
16.4 CPU Board Failures

Description:
The power LED is lit, but the printer has one of the following faults:
The printer refuses to start.
The program execution is halted.
The stepper motor does not work.
At startup, the message Starting is displayed followed by the message
Timed Out.

Flash or SDRAM SIMMs not properly fitted.
- A SIMM is not fully inserted in its socket. Remove all SIMMs and fit
them back again, making sure they are being firmly held by the snaplocks.
No Boot Flash SIMM in socket J20.
- A Flash SIMM containing a boot sector must be fitted in socket J20,
or the printer will not start.
Fluttering voltages.
- Check voltages on the CPU board test points, see Section 13.4. If a
voltage flutters with an interval of approximately one second, there
may be a short-circuit on the CPU board. If a voltage is missing,
there is probably an error in the power supply unit, see Section 16.5.
Startup error.
- Execution of the initial boot sequence can be checked as described
in Section 13.5. If the execution stops prematurely, try changing to a
Flash SIMM that works in another printer. If that does not help, note
where the startup sequence is halted and contact Intermecs Printer
Product Support dept.
- If there is no reaction neither on the display nor on the serial channel,
there is a major error on the CPU board. Check the Flash and
SDRAM SIMMs by installing them in another printer. Inspect
the CPU board visually in the area of the processor (U13) and the
support chip (U30). If no obvious fault is detected, replace the CPU
board.
218
16.5 Power Supply Unit Failures

Description:
The printer refuses to print.
The message Temperature high please wait(FP) or Printhead hot
(IPL) appears in the display window.
The power supply unit contains wires and circuits with dangerous
voltages. For safety reasons, it is strictly forbidden to try to repair
a power supply unit or to replace a blown fuse. Whenever a fuse
blows, always replace the entire power supply unit.
Das Netzteilmodul enthlt Kabel und Schaltkreise, die gefhrliche
Spannungen fhren. Aus Sicherheitsgrnden ist es streng untersagt,
ein Netzteilmodul zu reparieren oder eine durchgebrannte
Sicherung auszutauschen. Falls eine Sicherung durchbrennt, muss
das gesamte Netzteilmodul ausgetauscht werden.
Double Pole/Neutral Fusing. Parts may remain live after fuse
operation
Zweipolige/Neutralsicherung. Teile knnen nach Ansprechen der
Sicherung noch stromfhrend sein.

Power Failure Interrupt signal activated because of a Power Supply
overload.
- The power supply unit is overheated, due to extreme ambient
temperatures (possibly in connection with large black areas in the
print image, high speed printing, and media that require a high
energy level), which triggers the automatic overheating protection
switch.
Leave the power on and wait for the power supply to cool down (may
take up to half an hour). When the temperature returns to normal,
the printer will automatically restart. If the error persists, examine the
power supply (also see Chapter 12).
Description:
The printer stops working or functions are unstable.
The power LED is unstable, weak or not lit.
Stepper motor does not run.
None or very weak printout.

Wrong or missing voltages from power supply.
- Check voltages using the test points on the CPU board (see Section
13.4).
- Check the cable between the power supply unit and the CPU board.
If the cable is OK, replace the power supply unit.
219
- Blown fuse in power supply. Replace the entire power supply unit (see
Warning notice).
- Stepper motor driver has been damaged because the platen roller has
been manually rotated while power was on. Replace PSU.
16.6 Console Errors

Description:
The complete console is dead.
Power LED is not lit.
Green background lighting in display window is not lit.
The 5V on the CPU board is OK (see Section 13.4).

Defective cable.
- The cable between the CPU board and the console pcb. may be
defective or not properly connected. Check cable and connector J50
on CPU board.
Defective console pcb.
- Replace. Do not attempt to repair.
Description:
No keys on the keyboard seem to be working or no keybeep.
Power LED is lit.
Green background lighting in display window is lit.

Bad connection between keypad and console pcb.
- Check connections on the two flat cables between the keypad and
connectors P2 and P3 on console pcb.
Keys disabled or keyboard remapped by a custom-made program.
- If the printer does not respond to any keys in the Test Mode, the
keyboard is defective and needs to be replaced.
Keybeep disabled by a custom-made program (Fingerprint only).
- If no beep is heard when the keys are pressed in the Test Mode, but
the printer nevertheless responds to the keys, the beeper is out of
220
order.
Keyboard damaged by moisture.
- Soaking the keyboard with, for example, water or cleaning fluids, may
cause short-circuits. Let it dry, replace if necessary.
Description:
No messages appear in the display window after power-up.
Power LED is lit.
Green background lighting in display window is lit.

Display not utilized by custom-made program (Fingerprint only).
- If there is no display function in the Test Mode, the display is out of
order and the console unit needs to be replaced. Else, check out the
custom-made program.
221
16.7 Error Messages

Description:
An error message appears in the display window or is returned via a serial
port.
The printer stops functioning.
The Error LED is usually lit.
Consult the Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx, Programmers Reference Manual
or IPL Programming, Reference Manual for the meaning of the different
error codes and use that information to correct the error.
Depending on the firmware, printers mode, or running program, there are
different ways of giving the error message.
Immediate Mode (Fingerprint only)
The firmware can detect and return three error conditions, provided the
printhead is lowered and a media feed is executed.
- Error 1005 (Out of paper)
- Error 1027 (Out of transfer ribbon)
- Error 1031 (Next label not found)
Programming Mode (Fingerprint only)
At every erroneous instruction during programming, the printer
transmits an error code on the selected standard OUT channel (serial
communication only), provided the verbosity is not disabled. The same
applies if programming errors are detected when the program is run.
When a program is executed, the same errors as in the Immediate
Mode will be detected. The execution stops and an error message is
transmitted. It is recommended to included some kind of error handler
in any custom-made application program, for example ERRHAND.
PRG.
Intermec Direct Protocol (Fingerprint only)
Six error conditions can be detected. Note that by default verbosity is
off in the Intermec Direct Protocol.
- Error 1005 (Out of paper)
- Error 1006 (No field to print)
- Error 1022 (Head lifted)
- Error 1027 (Out of transfer ribbon)
- Error 1031 (Next label not found)
- Error 1606 (Testfeed not done)
The Intermec Direct Protocol has a programmable error-handler. Refer
to the Intermec Direct Protocol v8.xx, Programmers Reference Manual.
222
IPL only
Six possible errors are indicated by messages in the display window:
- Printhead hot
(Printhead over-temperature)
- Paused
(Empty/paused)
- Paper out
(Out of media)
- Ribbon out
(Out of transfer ribbon
- Print head UP/Press Feed
(Printhead lifted)
- Open&shut cutter
(Cutter error)
Some additional errors can be returned to the host as an ASCII number by
the <BEL> command, see IPL Programming, Reference Manual.
Firmware Error
In case the CPU is unable to access data on a given address, the internal
program will light up the red error LED regardless of any error-handling
program.
223
16.8 No Communication (general)

Description:
The following actions are valid for all communication interfaces installed
in the printer.

Defective cable between printer and host.
- Check that the communication cable is correctly inserted and that it
is of the correct type and is correctly configured.
- Check that any clips or ground screws are properly engaged.
- Inspect cable for physical damage.
- Disconnect and connect the cable a few times to rub off possible
oxide from the connectors.
- Try using another identical cable.
Defective cable between interface board and CPU board. (This does
not apply to the serial port "uart1:", the USB port, or any EasyLAN
board which all are fitted directly on the CPU board).
- Check that the cable is connected correctly.
- Inspect cable for physical damage.
- Disconnect and connect the cable a few times to rub off possible
oxide from the connectors.
- Replace the cable.
Error in host.
- Try connecting the printer to another host computer.
Erroneous data.
- Check if the data string contains the correct characters using the Line
Analyzer program included in Intermec Shell (see the printers Users
Guide).
224
16.9 No Serial Communication

Description:
The following actions are valid for the standard serial interface "uart1:"
fitted on the CPU board and to some extent also to any other serial
interfaces on optional interface boards. Also see Section 16.8.

Communication setup mismatch.
- Press the <i/F5> key or enter the Setup Mode to check that the
printer and host are set for the same communication parameters,
such as baud rate, parity, character length, stopbits, new line and
handshaking. It is stongly recommended to use some kind of
handshaking, for example XON/XOFF or RTS/CTS.
Damaged RS-232 driver circuit.
- With the aid of an oscilloscope, or some kind of line analyzer (breakout box), verify that the interface signals to and from the CPU board
are correct. The RS-232 driver (U61) could have been damaged as a
result of voltage transients from the interface, necessitating the CPU
board to be replaced. Repeated damage is an indication of insufficient
cable screening, or the electrical environment being too noisy.
Circuits or straps on an optional interface board missing or fitted
incorrectly.
- See configuration instructions in Chapter 14.
No supply voltage.
- Verify that the +3.3VDC and +5VDC voltages are present (see
Section 13.4).
No external +5VDC.
- The printer supplies max. 500 mA. The current is automatically
switched off at higher loads. Check the consumption of the
connected device.
- The switch (RP60 on the CPU board; IC9 on the Industrial Interface
Board and the Double Serial Interface Board) may be out of range
and need to be replaced.
Too long communication cables.
- RS-232
max. 10-15 m (33-49 ft).
- RS-422
max. 1,200 m (4,000 ft).
- RS-485
max. 1,200 m (4,000 ft).
- Current Loop
max. 500 m (1,500 ft).
225
Input buffer on host overflow.

- The input buffer should normally be handled by the software of the
host. Increase the receive buffer in the printer to a large value, restart
the host to empty its input buffer and try again.
No response from printer a custom-made program is run (Fingerprint
only).
- The verbosity can be controlled using the Fingerprint instructions
VERBON/VERBOFF and SYSVAR(18). In the Intermec Direct
Protocol, verbosity is disabled by default. Check the program for
instructions that affect the verbosity.
- Verify that the correct communication port is selected as standard
IN/OUT channel.
226
16.10 Network Communication Problems

This section applies both to EasyLAN Ethernet and EasyLAN Wireless
communication between a printer and a local area network. It does not
cover general network problems in other types of equipment, such as
wiring, access points, routers, switches, servers, etc. It is assumed that the
network is in good working order, that is, other devices connected to the
network works well and the trouble can be pinpointed to the printer.
Description:
The printer cannot communicate with the network after the network
interface has been installed.

Defect interface board or bad connection between interface board and
CPU board.
- Print a Hardware test label in the Setup Mode to see if the printer
recognizes the interface board. Also check if the Network node is
shown in the Setup Mode. If not, switch off the power, disconnect
the interface board, clean the connectors, and connect the interface
again. Switch on the power. Print a new Hardware test label. If the
problems remains, replace the interface board.
Wireless only: Also check that the radio module is properly connected
to the adapter board. If the radio module is not connected properly,
the Network node will be displayed in the Setup Mode but the
wireless interface will not be recognized on the hardware test label.
Bad internal cabling.
- Ethernet only: Check that the network extension cable is properly
connected to the interface board. Visually check the cable for breaks
or shavings.
- Wireless only: Check that the antenna cable is properly connected to
the connection point marked MAIN on the radio module. Check
the cable for breaks or shavings.
Check that the antenna is properly connected and is pointing straight
up.
Bad connection between printer and an Ethernet network
- Check the network LED indicator at the back of the printer. There
should be a green light flashing occasionally showing network activity
or a solid yellow background light if connected to a 100 Mbps
network. Note that there is no background light indication provided
for 10 Mbps wired networks.
- Check that the network cable is connected correctly to the network
wall socket, hub, or similar and to the RJ-45 socket on the printers
rear plate.
- Check that the cable connecting to the network is not of "crossover"
227
type. Use a straight "pin to pin" cable to connect to a LAN, but use a
crossover cable to connect directly to a PC.
If you are trying to connect the printer directly to a PC via a crossover
network cable, you may need to disable the web browsers proxy
settings on your computer to get in contact with the printers web
pages.
Bad communication between printer and a Wireless network
- Check the network LED indicator at the back of the printer. There
should be a green light flashing occasionally showing network activity,
or a solid yellow background light if the network card is associated
with an access point, or flashing yellow light if the network card is
searching for an access point.
- Press the <i> key on the printers front panel and browse to the
network information. There you can see the present signal strength
and channel. If both are 0, the network card is not associated with
any access point and/or the WLAN settings are wrong.
- Check if the access point is on.
- Check if the access point lists the MAC address of the network card.
- Check if other devices associated with this access point are working.
- Inspect the location and see if there is any reason why the radio
transmission between printer and access point is prevented, such
as shielding objects like walls, shelves, fork lifts, metal grids, etc.
Sometimes, just moving the printer around a little may help.
For demanding applications, Intermec offers a series of high gain
antennas that can replace the standard antenna.
- Check SSID settings.
- Check WEP settings. Note that you must have the same WEP key
settings in both the printer and the access point in regard of both the
content of the WEP keys and the order of the WEP keys. However,
you can have one active WEP key selected in the printer and another
in the access point.
- Check the region setting, which can be found on the Network Info
test label.
Description:
The printer seems to be physically connected to the network but cannot
communicate.

Bad IP Settings in printer
- Use a PC connected to the same network as the printer. First of all
verify the network configuration of the printer as described in the
Installation Instructions provided with the kit.
228
PC Settings
You should verify that the PC has a working connection to the
network. Do this by opening a Command Prompt and type the
command that corresponds to your operating system:
- For Windows 95, 98 and ME, use the command WINIPCFG.
- For Windows NT4, 2000 and XP, use the command IPCONFIG.
The PC will show a table with its configuration containing the
settings for IP-address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway. Verify
these settings to be sure that the computer is correctly configured to
access your network.
Printer Settings
Check the IP address of the printer. Press the <i> key on the printers
keyboard and use the <> and <> keys to browse to the IP address.
In Fingerprint, a prerequisite is that the standard IN port is set either
to "auto" or "net1:", which can be done using Intermec Shell.
Another method is using the Setup Mode:
Press the <Setup> key, on the printers internal keyboard, and step
your way to NETWORK using the <> key.
By pressing <Enter> on the printer, you can step through the
configuration to verify the settings.
Press <Setup> to exit the Setup Mode.
More information about configuration settings can be obtained by
printing a test label.
Also check on the printers home page (Configuration [TCP/IP]) that
the net1 TCP Port Number is correct (default 9100).
Verifying IP Address
In the Users Guide of the printer, you will find information on how
to print test labels in the chapter Setting Up the Printer. Print the
network test label and find the IP Address field. If the IP address is set
to 0.0.0.0, the network card has not received a IP address. Verify the
IP SELECTION setting under the NETWORK menu in the Setup
Mode. See the Installation Instructions for information on various
methods for setting the IP address automatically or manually.
Verifying Subnet Mask
Check subnet mask of PC and printer and make sure they belong to
the same segment. For example:
If they have the subnet mask The numbers in the PC and Printer IP
addresses have to be
255.255.255.0
<Same>.<Same >.<Same >.<Any >
255.255.0.0
<Same>.<Same >.<Any >.<Any >
255.0.0.0
<Same>.<Any >.<Any >.<Any >
Other subnet masks
Contact the network administrator
229
In case the addresses are not in the same network segment, the printer
may not be reachable from the LAN side. Check the configuration
with the administrator.
Pinging the Printer
Start the Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt, type Ping
<printer IP-Address> and then click OK.
This command sends an echo command to the EasyLAN to check
if the PC and the printer can reach each other through the network.
The following figure shows a correct response to the Ping command.
The first reply to the first Ping command often takes more time than
the following. This is a normal behavior. The first time the Ping
command is executed, the PC needs some extra time to perform
a discovery of the network address (ARP request). The Ping
command makes the printers network LED flash green.
If you have completed the test procedure and all the conditions are
met, but you do not get any answer to the Ping command, then you
probably have a hardware problem.
Description:
The performance of a Wireless network connection ceases to work or the
performance deteriorates after having worked properly for some time after
installation.

Bad radio connection between printer and access point.
- Either the printer or the access point has been moved after installation
or some kind of obstruction has come between printer and access
point. In principle, there should be a free line-of sight between the
access point and the antenna. There is also a distance limit.
Check the signal strength.
- Check network test label for statistics.
- Try moving either the printer or the access point (or both) or
consider fitting a higher gain antenna.
Slow response.
- Too many devices associated with the same access point.
230
16.11 Sensor Malfunctions

Label Stop Sensor (LSS)
Description:
Label (ticket) gap or black mark not detected by the label stop sensor (LSS)
or wrong amount of media feed.

Lost or obsolete media feed data, for example after a headlift, change
of media, or replacement of the sensor.
- In Fingerprint, perform a TESTFEED operation, for example by
simultaneously pressing <Shift> and <Feed> or selecting the Testfeed
option in the Setup Mode.
- In IPL, adjust the media feed by pressing the Feed/Pause button.
Bad LSS lateral alignment.
- Check that the gaps or marks actually pass between the upper and
lower parts the label stop sensor (lateral alignment), see Section 7.5.
- Check that both parts of the LSS are adjusted to the same lateral
position, see Section 7.5.
Light path obstructed.
- Check that both the upper and lower sensors as well as the windows
in the upper and lower guide plates are clean and free from dust,
stuck labels, or other matters that may interfere with the path of light.
Printer set for wrong media type.
- Set up the printer for the correct media type.
Media feed detection using PRSTAT (Fingerprint only).
- PRSTAT AND 8 only checks for out-of-media conditions once as
opposed to the normal error checking (errors 1005 and 1031) that
checks for out-of-media conditions more or less continuously. Thus.
when using PRSTAT, a dark spot or a bad media angle can give an
incorrect out-of-media indication, especially when using tickets (w.
mark).
Bad connection
- Check the LSS cables and make sure that they are correctly connected
to J54 and J55 on the CPU board, see Section 13.3.
Faulty sensor or diode.
- Replace LSS as described in Section 7.5.
CPU board not configured for the right type of printer.
- Reconfigure the CPU board as described in Section 13.8.
231
Headlift Sensor
Description:
The printer does not work, although the printhead is lowered.
Error condition 1022 Head lifted (FP) or Print Head UP/Press Feed
(IPL) is indicated at any attempt of printing a label.

Headlift sensor blocked.
- Check the sensor for dust or foreign objects.
Bad connection.
- Check that the sensors cable is connected to J58 on the CPU board.
Inspect cable for damage.
Faulty sensor.
- Replace as described in Section 7.7.
Label Taken Sensor (LTS)

Description:
The label taken sensor (LTS) is not working properly.

Intermec Fingerprint instruction missing.
- The LTS must either be enabled using an LTS& ON statement, or
the status of the LTS must be polled using a PRSTAT function in the
current Intermec Fingerprint program.
IPL instruction missing.
- The self-strip mode must be enabled using the commands
<STX>R<ETX> and <STX><SI>t1<ETX>.
Bad connection.
- Check that the LTS is correctly connected to J53 on the CPU board.
- Check that the cable between CPU board and sensor is not damaged.
Dirty sensor.
- Make sure that the active parts of the sensor are not obstructed by
dust or foreign objects.
Wrong LTS sensitivity.
- The sensitivity of the sensors receiver and the light intensity of the
sensors emitter are adjustable, see Section 9.3.
Interference from sunlight or lamps.
- Shield the sensor from interfering light source.
Defective sensor.
- If still no reaction, the sensor is probably defective. Replace.
232
Ribbon Sensor
Description:
The ribbon sensor is not working properly.

Bad sensor adjustment (Fingerprint only).
- Adjust the sensor in the Setup Mode as described in Section 6.4.
Bad connection or faulty sensor.
- Cable between the ribbon sensor and J56 on the CPU board
damaged or not correctly connected?
- Sensor blocked by dust or foreign matters? Clean.
- Faulty ribbon sensor? Replace.
Bad detection pattern inside ribbon supply bobbin.
- Check the black and silvery sector pattern at the inner end of the
ribbon supply bobbin for scratches or dust.
233
16.12 Printing Problems

The best way to start is to get an overall check of the printout quality by
printing a series of test labels in the Test Mode.
If you suspect a defective printhead, you can check it out using the
following Intermec Fingerprint instructions (see Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx,
Programmers Reference Manual):
FUNCTEST$ ("HEAD")
HEAD
SYSVAR(21)
SYSVAR(22)
Description:
No printout at all.

Bad connection.
- Is the cable between the printhead and P5 on the Power Supply Unit
fitted correctly and not broken or otherwise damaged?
- Is the cable between the printhead and J40 on the CPU board fitted
correctly and not broken or otherwise damaged?
Dirty printhead.
- Is the printhead clean? Residue from label adhesive, thermal paper
topcoating, or preprint ink prevents the printhead from functioning
correctly. Clean the printhead as described in the Users Guide.
Wrong type of direct thermal media.
- In case of direct thermal printing, verify that the media is intended
for direct thermal printing (not thermal transfer!) and of an approved
quality.
Wrong type of thermal transfer ribbon.
- In case of thermal transfer printing, verify that the stock of ribbon is
of an approved quality.
Transfer ribbon loaded incorrectly.
- Verify if the ribbon is laoded with the ink-coated side facing the
receiving face material. If not, reload the ribbon as described in the
Users Guide.
Transfer ribbon mechanism failure.
- See Section 16.13
Wrong printhead voltage.
- Check that the printhead voltage +24VDC 2V (see Section 13.4).
If the power on the CPU board is OK, but the trouble remains,
disconnect the power cable on the inner side of the printhead and use
probes to measure the voltage during printing between two adjacent
lines in the socket (see Section 12.4, connector P5 for schematics).
234
Wrong printhead pressure.

- Check that the printhead is pressing against the media with a
sufficient force, see Section 7.8.
Headlift sensor out of order.
- Check the headlift sensor as described in Section 16.11.
Description:
Overall weak printout.

Various reasons.
- Check as for No printout at all.
Wrong Contrast/Darkness setup.
- Check setup for extremely low value.
Wrong Paper Type/Media Sensitivity setup.
- Verify that setup matches the direct thermal media or the
combination of transfer ribbon and media.
- Measure the +24VDC on the CPU board, see Section 13.4.
Printhead pressure too low.
- Adjust as described in Section 7.8.
Description:
Weaker printout on either inner or outer part of label.

Bad printhead pressure alignment.
- Adjust the position of the headlift arm as described in Section 7.8.
Description:
Overall too dark printout (bleeding). Too dark a printout is particularly
troublesome when printing compact bar codes, in which case spaces
between the bars become less distinctive, and consequently less readable.

Wrong Contrast/Darkness setup.
- Check Contrast/Darkness setup for extremely high value.
Wrong Paper Type/Media Sensitivity setup.
- Verify that setup matches the direct thermal media or the combination of transfer ribbon and media.
- Measure the +24VDC on the CPU board, see Section 13.4.
235
Description:
Weak or missing printout of some dots.

Dirty printhead or platen roller.
- Examine the printhead and the platen roller for dust, adhesive
residue, or visible damage.
- Clean or replace.
One or two missing dots.
- May be due to mechanical damage to the printhead. Try to establish
why such damage have occurred in order to prevent future failures of
this kind. (Hard foreign particles, electrostatic discharge?)
- If the printer has been used for printing on less than full width labels
for some time, the platen roller and possibly also the printhead may
have become worn from the outer edge of the media. This will show
up when reverting to wider labels. Change the platen roller and
possibly also the printhead.
Preprinted ink has got stuck to the dot line.
- Avoid preprinted labels with ink that has a low melting point (less
than +225C/+437F).
Many dots, or a block of dots, are missing.
- The internal IC circuit of the printhead is probably damaged. Replace
the printhead.
Description:
Unexpected black printout (completely or partially).

- If the printer unexpectedly produces completely or partially black
printout, or prints a black line across the media at startup (regardless
of label layout), check that the printhead voltage +24VDC 2V
(see Section 13.4). If the power on the CPU board is OK, but the
trouble remains, disconnect the power cable on the inner side of the
printhead and use probes to measure the voltage during printing
between two adjacent lines in the socket (see Section 12.4, connector
P5 for schematics). If too high, in the range of 40 to 50V during
printing, replace the power supply unit.
- The printhead is most certainly damaged too and will also need to be
replaced.
236
Description:
Media feed does not work properly.

Faulty stepper motor.
- Connect a replacement stepper motor to P10 on the Power Supply
Unit (see Chapter 12) and perform a PRINTFEED or FORMFEED
operation. If this motor runs, the original stepper motor is probably
damaged and needs to be replaced (see Section 7.3).
Dirty or worn platen roller.
- Inspect the platen roller for visible wear. Replace if necessary (see
Section 7.2).
- Clean the platen roller using a cleaning card or a soft cloth moistened
with isopropyl alcohol. Paper dust or adhesive residue can deteriorate
the media feed function or make the media slip.
Intermec Fingerprint instruction missing.
- Verify that a print command is actually issued in the current Intermec
Fingerprint program.
Power Supply Unit malfunction or bad connection.
- The stepper motor could be incorrectly connected to P10 on the
PSU, or its drive circuit (U13) on the PSU could be damaged.
- Check that all pins in the connector of the stepper motors cable are
fully inserted.
- Measure the +24VDC on the CPU board, see Section 13.4. If there is
no power, when an attempt to print is made, the power supply unit is
probably faulty.
Description:
Partially compressed print image.

Jerks in the media feed caused by for example a large media supply roll
in combination with a high print speed setting.
- Refer to the printers Users Guide (Setting Up the Printer/Print
Defines/Print Speed) for restrictions of print speed in combination
with certain sizes of media supply.
Description:
Excessive wear of printhead.

Various reasons.
- Refer to Section 7.6 Printhead/Precautions for advices on how to
reduce the wear of the printhead.
237
16.13 Transfer Ribbon Problems

Description:
The thermal transfer ribbon breaks.

Wrong brand of ribbon.
- Check if the transfer ribbon is of an approved brand. If not,
recommend the customer to use approved brands only.
Bad ribbon load.
- Check that the ribbon is routed so it runs above upper guide (that is,
the one where the upper part of the LSS is fitted).
Wrong paper type setup.
- Check that the printer is set up correctly for the type of thermal
transfer ribbon in use, see the printers Users Guide.
- Check printhead voltage, see Section 13.4.
Description:
The thermal transfer ribbon wrinkles.

Media misalignment.
- Is the edge guide positioned so as to guide the media closely along the
printers center section?
- Is the media supply roll as far in on the post or hub as possible?
Ribbon misalignment.
- Are both the ribbon supply roll and the ribbon rewind core pressed as
far in on their hubs as possible?
Ribbon path obstructed.
- Check that nothing obstructs the path of the transfer ribbon.
Wrong or uneven printhead pressure.
- Check that the pressure arm is center-aligned in the relation to the
width of the media, see Section 7.8.
- Check the printhead pressure, see Section 7.8. Decrease the pressure
somewhat and test for both wrinkles and printout contrast. You may
need to feed out 25-50 cm of ribbon (1-2 ft.) before you can see any
effect.
Bad ribbon break shaft adjustment.
- Check the adjustment of the front ribbon break shaft, see Section 6.6.
Do not change the adjustment before you have performed all other
checks mentioned above.
238
Description:
No transfer printout.

Refer to Section 16.12 for general printout problems.
Bad ribbon load.
- Transfer ribbon loaded incorrectly so the ink-coated side does not face
the receiving face material. Reload ribbon.
Description:
Ribbon fed out in front of printer.

Printer is set up for direct thermal printing, but a ribbon is loaded.
- Remove ribbon or change the paper type setup to thermal transfer.
Ribbon rewind motor does not run.
- Cable between ribbon motor and P6 on the Power Supply Unit
broken or not correctly connected?
- Faulty ribbon sensor? See Section 16.11.
- Faulty ribbon motor? Replace.
- Faulty CPU board? Replace.
- Faulty Power Supply Unit? Replace.

239
16.14 Liner Takeup Problems

Description:
The internal liner takeup unit does not work properly.

Bad liner takeup or bad separation of labels from liner at the tear bar.
- Check that the media is routed correctly as described in the Users
Guide.
- Check that the liner is securely locked to the takeup hub by the brace,
so it cannot slip.
- Check the setup for incorrect media type and feed adjust settings.
Takeup unit slips.
- Spring clutch inside the takeup hub is broken.
- Either the outside of the pulley or the inside of the hub has become
worn.
Either the liner drive roller in the print mechanism or the takeup hub
is not driven by the stepper motor.
- Check if any of the belts from the stepper motor is broken or has
come off the pulleys, see Section 8.2.
Neither the liner drive roller in the print mechanism nor the takeup
hub is driven by the stepper motor.
- Check if the stepper motor runs. If not, check as for Media feed does
not work in Section 16.12.
- Check if both the belts from the stepper motor are broken or have
come off the pulleys, see Section 8.2.
240
16.15 Memory Card Problems

Description:
The printer cannot read a memory card. Note that in IPL, memory cards
are not used to expand the printers memory.

Memory card not inserted at startup.
- The card must be inserted before the power is switched on or the
printer is rebooted.
Memory card incorrectly inserted.
- Check that the card is inserted as far as it goes.
Bad contact between card and adapter.
- Switch off the printer. Pull out and insert the card a few times to rub
off any oxide on the connectors.
Wrong type of memory card.
- The memory cards must be Type I CompactFlash cards (thickness 3.3
mm/0.13 in.) commonly used with digital cameras. PCMCIA-cards
or Type II CompactFlash cards (thickness 5 mm/0.20 in.) cannot
be used. If a CompactFlash card is marked CF+, it is probably not a
regular memory card and cannot be used.
Error in content of the card.
- If you have access to a PC equipped with a CompactFlash card reader,
list the memory content of the PC memory card to see if it is correct.
- If you can communicate with the printer via a PC, you could see
what files are stored in the memory card and their sizes with the aid
of Intermec Fingerprint command FILES "card1:".
- Try to format the card in the printer using the Fingerprint instruction
FORMAT "card1:",A. Also see Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx,
Programmers Reference Manual.
Hardware error.
- Inspect the memory card for mechanical damage.
- Examine the memory card adapter on the CPU board for damaged
card mating pins, breakage, or bad soldering.
241
16.16 Paper Cutter Problems

Description:
The printer cannot detect the cutter.
In Fingerprint, error 37, Cutter device not found or Error 1059, Cutter
does not respond occurs.

No reboot has been performed after installation.
- Cycle the power to the printer.
Cable between cutter pcb and CPU board is not fitted properly.
- Check that the cable has not come loose from the cutter pcb and is
fitted so all the slack is between the cable cover and the cutter, see
Section 10.2.
Faulty cable, cutter pcb, or CPU board.
- Replace one at the time, reboot, and check. Make sure that the
correct type of cable is used (see label on cable).
Description:
The cutter does not cut.

Error 1704, Cutter open occurs in Fingerprint.
- Check that the cutter is positively in closed position.
- The microswitch on the cutter assy may be defect. Replace the cutter
assy.
- Faulty cable, cutter pcb, or CPU board. Replace one at the time,
reboot, and check.
Errors 1701-1703 occurs.
- Check the cutter top position sensor on the cutter pcb for dust and
similar. Clean if necessary.
- Check the cutting shears and cutter mechanism for adhesive residue,
label shavings, stuck labels, or other things that may prevent the
cutter from operating mechanically. Clean if necessary, but do not use
any solvent that can dissolve the grease.
- Replace the cutter assy or cutter pcb, one at the time.
No error occurs but cutter does still not cut.
- If using Fingerprint, check that the application program utilizes the
Fingerprint statements CUT or CUT ON/OFF correctly. See the
Intermec Fingerprint v8.xx, Programmers Reference Manual.
The Print or Feed/Pause button on the cutter does not work.
- Replace the cutter pcb.
242
Description:
The cutter cuts at the wrong place.

Faulty LSS or bad Feedadjust setup.
- In Fingerprint, perform a Testfeed to adjust the LSS.
- In IPL, check the End-of-Print Skip Distance.
- Check Start- and Stopadjust setup values (Fingerprint only).
- Check application for FORMFEED<nnn> instructions (Fingerprint
only).
243
16.17 RFID Problems

You must exit any running application before you start troubleshooting
your RFID-equipped printer.
Description:
"No tag found" is displayed when a TESTFEED is attempted.

The inlay could be broken.
- Replace the inlay or use an entirely new label.
You are not currently using RFID media.
- Load the printer with RFID media.
The current TAGADJUST value is incorrect.
- Align the label with the edge of the tear bar (Fingerprint) or
dot line (IPL). Leave the lid open and measure the distance between
the middle of the inlay and a point orthogonally right above the
antenna. Convert the distance to dots.
TAGADJUST = Distance * TPHresolution(mm)
Enter the TAGADJUST value in the SETUP menu with the com-
mand:
SETUP RFID,TAGADJUST,<value>
(Fingerprint)
<SI>J1,<value>
(IPL)
Example:
TPH resolution 203 dpi
DISTANCE 15 mm
TAGADJUST = 15 * 203 / 25.4 = 120 dots
Description:
An application writing to Class 2 RFID tags produces a large number of
VOID labels.

Verify that the TAGADJUST value is set correctly.
- Follow the procedure as described above
The output power to the antenna could need adjusting.
- Adjust the FIELDSTRENGTH variable. FIELDSTRENGTH
can be set to any value between 0 (=15 dBm amplification) and
100 (=27dBm amplification). The graph on the next page shows
how the output power changes with the manipulation of the
FIELDSTRENGTH (FS) variable.
244
30
25
20
P(dBm)
15
10
5
0
1
13
19
25
31
37
43
49
55
61
67
73
79
85
91
97
-5
-10
-15
FS(%)
Adjust FIELDSTRENGTH in Setup mode or use the following

commands:
SETUP "RFID,FIELDSTRENGTH,<value>"
(Fingerprint)
<SI>J1,m,o,p
(IPL)
where o is the fieldstrength variable, a value between 1 and 100.
Description:
None of the RFID commands work. The message "RFID inactive" is
displayed.

The RFID mode has been disabled.
- Turn it on with the following commands:
SETUP "RFID,MODE,ENABLE"
(Fingerprint)
<SI>J1
(IPL)
Description:
Printing on non-RFID media is slow and printing is halted inbetween
labels.

RFID mode is enabled.
- Turn it off with the following commands:
SETUP "RFID,MODE,DISABLE"
(Fingerprint)
245
<SI>J0
(IPL)
Description:
After the printer has been loaded with a new roll of RFID media, it is
unable to write to the tags.

The printer has not yet identified the RFID media type.
- If RFID media is changed without the printer having been turned
OFF, it resets the inlay type and waits for a TESTFEED to identify
the new RFID media. A TESTFEED should take care of this
problem.
Description:
RFID operations yield "Not supported by tag type" error messages.

A command tries to access a tag data segment that is not available on
the current RFID media.
- Example: Attempting to perform tag read/write operations on the
EPC segment of an ISO tag.
A command is referring to a tag format that is not available on the
current RFID media.
- Example: Trying to write an EPC-96 format to a 64-bit tag.
A command is used together with a "level" that is not allowed for a
particular tag type.
- Example: using the Fingerprint command TAGPROTECT
"UNLOCKP" or the corresponding IPL command n5 on an ISO
18000-6B tag.
Description:
Data can be written unlawfully to a write-protected ISO 18000-6B tag.

For some ISO 18000-6B tag chips the functionality to protect the tag
memory from being rewritten has not been implemented.
- Switch to tags with a different chip that have this functionality
implemented.
Description:
TAGWRITE commands yield "Invalid parameter" error messages.

The user is trying to store an excessive amount of data in the tags
memory.
An invalid value has been entered, e.g. an uneven number of characters
for one of the "HEX" formats or an incorrect number of digits for a
246
parameter defining an EPC-format.
Description:
TAGREAD commands yield "Wrong number of parameters" error
messages.

The number of required parameters depend on what TAGFORMAT
has been defined for the read operation.
- See the manual for Fingerprint v8.60 or later. Additional information
can be found in the EPC Tag Data Standard (v1.1, revision 1.27)
document available via http://www.epcglobalinc.org/standards_
technology/specifications.html.
Description:
The message "Error in filename" is displayed when RFID mode is set to
ON.

No RFID kit is installed in the printer.
Description:
ISO 18000-6B tags work fine, but reading Class 1 tags yield a "No tag
found" error message.

ISO 18000-6B tags are addressed with the IM3 or IM5 RFID reader.
For these modules, Class 1 support has not been implemented yet.
Class 1 tags require an MPR6100 RFID Radio Module.
- An MPR6100 can be ordered from Intermec Sales as part of an
upgrade kit ("RFID Kit (Class 1, 915 MHz").
Description:
"RFID" does not show up in the SETUP tree.

The printer does not communicate properly with the RFID hardware.
- Check that the RFID kit has been installed in accordance with
the installation instructions. Check that the jumpers on the RFID
option board are set to the correct position.
- Print a hardware test label to see what hardware the printer has
recognized, confirm that the RFID option board is present on
the label (this rules out potential errors in the board or I/O cable).
- Test the RFID radio module by downloading and installing the latest
firmware. If the module proves faulty, replace it.
247
248
Program Overwiews
This appendix shows overwiews of the Intermec Shell and the Intermec
Fingerprint Setup Mode followed by overviews of the IPL Setup Mode.
Refer to the Users Guides for information on the various parameters and
instructions for navigation.
Intermec EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial Printers Service Manual
249
Appendix AProgram Overviews
Intermec Shell v8.0 Overview

ENTER=SHELL
SHELL
SEL. APPLICATION
5 sec.
SEL. APPLICATION
CURRENT APPL.
v.8.0
ENTER=SHELL
4 sec.
SEL. APPLICATION
v.8.0
Fingerprint 8.10
ENTER=SHELL
3 sec.
v.8.0
Last selected application is started
Note: Dotted channels are only shown if

the corresponding optional interface pcb
is fitted.
SEL. APPLICATION
STD I/O CHANNEL
Direct Protocol
auto
ENTER=SHELL
STD I/O CHANNEL
2 sec.
uart1:
v.8.0
ENTER=SHELL
STD I/O CHANNEL
1 sec.
uart2:
v.8.0
Last selected
application is started
Default:
Fingerprint 8.10 w. std I/O = "auto"
STD I/O CHANNEL

Optional application
uart3:
programs
STD I/O CHANNEL
centronics:
Legend:
The selected application is started
POWER ON
STD I/O CHANNEL

net1:
Return to previous menu.
STD I/O CHANNEL
Proceed to next menu.
usb1:
SEL.APPL rom:
Accept displayed option

and proceed, or
execute displayed option.
Perform a Testfeed
anywhere in Intermec Shell.
LINE_AXP.PRG
SHELL
SETUP:
SETUP
SER-COM,UART1
SHELL
Prints a list of current setup values (test label Setup Info).
PRINT SETUP
Enter the Setup Mode

from anywhere
in Intermec Shell.
See the chapter Setup Mode
SHELL
TESTFEED
Performs a Testfeed (feeds out a number of blank copies

while autoadjusting the label stop sensor).
SHELL
Prints test labels Diamonds, Chess, Bar Codes #1, and Bar Codes #2 in a loop.
Press Enter for each new label.
TEST LABEL
SHELL
ARE YOU SURE?
DEFAULT SETUP
DEFAULT SETUP
YES=ENTER/NO=ESC
PERFORMED
SHELL
UPDATE:
TRANSFER FILE
SOFTWARE UPDATE
COMPACT FLASH?
USING ZMODEM
TRANSFER
COMPLETED
SHELL
UPDATE:
TRANSFER FILE
REBOOT
FIRMWARE?
USING ZMODEM
Restarts the printer (same as power off/on)
Printer rebooted
automatically.
Note: To enter Intermec Shell if a custom-made autoexec-file prevents

access, lift the printhead and press any key on the printer's keyboard
(except the <Shift> key), then turn on the power while continuing to
press the key. When the Shell countdown begins, release the key and press
<Enter> to start Shell. Do not forget to lower the printhead if you want to
print for example test labels.
250
Setup Mode Overview (FP v8.74)
Ser-Com, uart1:
SETUP:
SER-COM, UART1
SETUP:
SER-COM, UART2
See separate overview
SETUP:
SER-COM, UART3
SETUP:
NET-COM, NET1
SETUP:
NETWORK
SER-COM, UART1:
BAUDRATE
SER-COM, UART1:
CHAR LENGTH
SER-COM, UART1:
PARITY
SER-COM, UART1:
STOP BITS
SER-COM, UART1:
FLOWCONTROL
PARITY:
NONE
PARITY:
EVEN
PARITY:
ODD
PARITY:
MARK
PARITY:
SPACE
STOP BITS:
1 STOP BITS:
2
Scroll forward
Scroll back
FLOW CONTROL:
RTS/CTS
FLOW CONTROL:
ENQ/ACK
RTS/CTS:
DISABLE
ENQ/ACK:
ENABLE
Scroll forward
Scroll back
ENQ-ACK:
DISABLE
ENQ/ACK:
ENABLE
Scroll forward
Scroll back
SER-COM, UART1:
NEW LINE
SER-COM, UART1:
REC BUF
SER-COM, UART1:
TRANS BUF
NEW LINE:
CR/LF
NEW LINE:
LFNEW LINE:
CR
REC BUF:
[1024]:
TRANS BUF:
[1024]:
BAUDRATE;
CHAR LENGTH
9600
8 CHAR LENGTH
BAUDRATE;
19200
BAUDRATE;
7
38400
BAUDRATE;
57500
BAUDRATE;
115200
BAUDRATE;
300
BAUDRATE;
600
BAUDRATE;
1200
BAUDRATE;
2400
BAUDRATE;
4800
Scroll forward
Scroll back
Scroll forward
Scroll back
FLOW CONTROL:
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF:
DATA TO HOST
XON/XOFF:
DATA FROM HOST
DATA TO HOST:
DISABLE
DATA TO HOST:
ENABLE
DATA FROM HOST:

DISABLE
DATA FROM HOST:
ENABLE
Scroll forward
Scroll back
SETUP:
RFID
next
page
Scroll forward
Scroll back
Scroll forward
Scroll back
251

Continued from the
previous page
252
Feed Adjust
Continued on
the next page
SETUP:
FEEDADJ
FEEDADJ:
STARTADJ
FEEDADJ:
STOPADJ:
STARTADJ:
[0]:
STOPADJ:
[0]:

Continued from
the previous page
Media
Continued on
the next page
SETUP:
MEDIA
MEDIA:
MEDIA SIZE
MEDIA:
MEDIA TYPE
MEDIA SIZE:
XSTART
MEDIA SIZE:
WIDTH
MEDIA SIZE:
LENGTH
XSTART:
[24]:
WIDTH:
[832]:
LENGTH:
[1200]:
MEDIA TYPE:
LABEL
GAPS)
MEDIA(wTYPE:
TICKET
(w MARK)
MEDIA TYPE:
TICKET
(w GAPS)
MEDIA TYPE:
FIX
LENGTH
MEDIA
TYPE:STRIP
VAR LENGTH STRIP
Scroll forward
Scroll back
TRANSFER:
RIBBON CONSTANT
TRANSFER:
RIBBON FACTOR
TRANSFER:
LABEL OFFSET
TRANSFER:
RIBBON SENSOR
TRANSFER:
LOW DIAMETER
RIBBON CONSTANT:
[90]:
RIBBON FACTOR:
[25]:
LABEL OFFSET:
[0]:
RIBBON SENSOR:
[14]:
LOW DIAMETER:
[0]:
MEDIA:
PAPER TYPE
PAPER TYPE:
TRANSFER
Only displayed if a paper sensor is installed.

MEDIA:
CONTRAST
MEDIA:
PAPER
PAPER TYPE:
DIRECT THERMAL
DIRECT THERMAL:
LABEL CONSTANT
DIRECT THERMAL:
LABEL FACTOR
LABEL CONSTANT
[85]:
LABEL FACTOR:
[40]:
CONTRAST:
+0%
CONTRAST:
+2%
CONTRAST:
+4%
CONTRAST:
+6%
CONTRAST:
+8%
CONTRAST:
+10%
CONTRAST:
-10%
CONTRAST:
-8%
CONTRAST:
-6%
CONTRAST:
-4%
CONTRAST:
-2%
PAPER:
PAPER SENSOR
PAPER:
LOW DIAMETER
PAPER SENSOR:
[10]:
LOW DIAMETER:
[0]:
Scroll forward
Scroll back
MEDIA:
TESTFEED
MEDIA:
TESTFEED MODE
MEDIA:
LEN (SLOW MODE)
TESTFEED:
[26 28 0 10]
Press <Enter> to perform a testfeed.
Values are read-only.
TESTFEED MODE:
FAST
TESTFEED MODE:
SLOW
Scroll forward
Scroll back
LEN (SLOW MODE):

[0]:
253

Continued from
the previous page
SETUP:
PRINT DEFS
Print Defs
Return to the start of the Setup Mode loop
(SETUP/SER-COM, UART1) or press <Setup>
to exit the Setup Mode.
PRINT DEFS:
HEAD RESIST
PRINT DEFS:
TESTPRINT
HEAD RESIST:
[nnn]:
Read-only
TESTPRINT:
PRINT SPEED:
LSS TEST:
DIAMONDS
[100]:
LSS AUTO
TESTPRINT:
CHESS
TESTPRINT:
BAR
CODES #1
TESTPRINT:
LSS AUTO:
BAR
CODES #2
TESTPRINT:
SETUP
INFO
TESTPRINT:
HARDWARE
INFO
TESTPRINT:
Only displayed if an
RFID
TEST LABEL
TESTPRINT:
optional EasyLAN board
NETWORK INFO
is installed.
Scroll forward
Scroll back
<Enter> to print
<?> for error info
PRINT DEFS:
CLIP DEFAULT
PRINT DEFS:
LTS
CLIP DEFAULT:
ONCLIP DEFAULT:
OFF
LTS:
LTS ADJUST
Toggle ON/OFF
REMOVE LABEL AND

PRESS ENTER
PRINT DEFS:
PRINT SPEED
PRINT DEFS:
LSS TEST
LSS TEST:
LSS MANUAL
LSS [G: 2]D: 6
Toggle between
gain (G) and drive
(D)
Decrease/increase
value inside
brackets
Only displayed if an optional LTS (Label Taken

Sensor) is installed in the printer.
LTS:
LTS TEST
REMOVE LABEL
ENTER TO STOP
LTS:
LTS VALUE
LTS VALUE:
[10]:
SENSITIVITY 10
OUT OF 9-10
254
Ser-Com, uart2
SETUP:SETUP:
SER-COM, UART2
These menus will only be displayed when an optional Double Serial or Serial/Industrial interface board is installed.
In case of a Double Serial interface baord, also see the overview for Serial Communication, uart3.
SER-COM, UART2:
BAUDRATE
SER-COM, UART2:
PROT ADDR
PROT ADDR:
BAUDRATE;
DISABLE
DATA TO HOST:
9600
BAUDRATE;
ENABLE
19200
BAUDRATE;
Only displayed in case
38400
BAUDRATE;
of RS485.
57500
BAUDRATE;
115200
BAUDRATE;
300
BAUDRATE;
600
BAUDRATE;
1200
BAUDRATE;
2400
BAUDRATE;
4800
SER-COM, UART2:
CHAR LENGTH
SER-COM, UART2:
PARITY
SER-COM, UART2:
STOP BITS
SER-COM, UART2:
FLOWCONTROL
CHAR LENGTH
8 CHAR LENGTH
7
PARITY:
NONE
PARITY:
EVEN
PARITY:
ODD
PARITY:
MARK
PARITY:
SPACE
STOP BITS:
1 STOP BITS:
2
FLOW CONTROL:
RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS:
DISABLE
ENQ/ACK:
ENABLE
Menus inside this dotted box are not displayed in case of RS485 on "uart2:".
FLOW CONTROL:
ENQ/ACK
FLOW CONTROL:
XON/XOFF
ENQ-ACK:
DISABLE
ENQ/ACK:
ENABLE
XON/XOFF:
DATA TO HOST
XON/XOFF:
DATA FROM HOST
DATA TO HOST:
DISABLE
DATA TO HOST:
ENABLE
DATA FROM HOST:

DISABLE
DATA FROM HOST:
ENABLE
SER-COM, UART2:
TRANS BUF
SER-COM, UART2:
CONNECTED HW
SER-COM, UART2:
PROTOCOL ADDR.
TRANS BUF:
[1024]:
CONNECTED HW:
RS232
Read-only
PROTOCOL ADDR.
[1]:
Only displayed in case of
RS485 on "uart2:".
Enter printers protocol
address (031).
SER-COM, UART2:
NEW LINE
SER-COM, UART2:
REC BUF
NEW LINE:
CR/LF
NEW LINE:
LFNEW LINE:
CR
REC BUF:
[1024]:
255

SETUP:
SER-COM, UART3
SER-COM, UART3:
BAUDRATE
Ser-Com, uart3
These menus will only be displayed when an optional Double Serial interface board is installed,
also see the overview for Serial Communication, uart2.
SER-COM, UART3:
CHAR LENGTH
BAUDRATE;
CHAR LENGTH
9600
8 CHAR LENGTH
BAUDRATE;
19200
BAUDRATE;
7
38400
BAUDRATE;
57500
BAUDRATE;
115200
BAUDRATE;
300
BAUDRATE;
600
BAUDRATE;
1200
BAUDRATE;
2400
BAUDRATE;
4800
SER-COM, UART3:
PARITY
SER-COM, UART3:
STOP BITS
SER-COM, UART3:
FLOWCONTROL
PARITY:
NONE
PARITY:
EVEN
PARITY:
ODD
PARITY:
MARK
PARITY:
SPACE
STOP BITS:
1 STOP BITS:
2
FLOW CONTROL:
RTS/CTS
FLOW CONTROL:
ENQ/ACK
RTS/CTS:
DISABLE
ENQ/ACK:
ENABLE
ENQ-ACK:
DISABLE
ENQ/ACK:
ENABLE
SER-COM, UART3:
NEW LINE
SER-COM, UART3:
REC BUF
SER-COM, UART3:
TRANS BUF
NEW LINE:
CR/LF
NEW LINE:
LFNEW LINE:
CR
REC BUF:
[1024]:
TRANS BUF:
[1024]:
FLOW CONTROL:
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF:
DATA TO HOST
XON/XOFF:
DATA FROM HOST
DATA TO HOST:
DISABLE
DATA TO HOST:
ENABLE
DATA FROM HOST:

DISABLE
DATA FROM HOST:
ENABLE
SER-COM, UART3:
CONNECTED HW
CONNECTED HW:
RS232
Read-only
256
Network Communication
SETUP:
NET-COM, NET1
SETUP:
NETWORK
NET-COM, NET1:
NEW LINE
NETWORK:
IP SELECTION
NETWORK:
IP ADDRESS
NETWORK:
NETMASK
NETWORK:
DEFAULT ROUTER
NETWORK:
NAME SERVER
NEW LINE
CR/LF
BAUDRATE;
LFBAUDRATE;
CR
IP SELECTION:
DHCP+BOOTP
PARITY:
MANUAL
PARITY:
DHCP
PARITY:
BOOTP
IP ADDRESS:
192.168.1.79
Read-only if DCHP
and/or BOOTP
is selected.
NETMASK:
255.255.255.0
DEFAULT ROUTER:
192.168.1.1
NAME SERVER:
192.168.1.7
These menus will only be displayed when an optional EasyLAN interface board is installed.
NETWORK:
MAC ADDRESS
MAC ADDRESS:
00104017b80e
257

SETUP:
RFID
RFID
These menus will only be displayed when an RFID module is installed.
RFID:
MODE
RFID:
TAGADJUST
RFID:
VOIDTEXT
RFID:
RETRIES
RFID:
FIELDSTRENGTH
MODE:
ENABLE
MODE:
DISABLE
TAGADJUST:
+0
VOIDTEXT:
VOID
Read-Only
RETRIES:
1
FIELDSTRENGTH:
100
258
Setup Mode Overview (IPL v2.74)
Serial Communication
SETUP:
SER-COM
SER-COM:
BAUDRATE
Continued on
the next page
SER-COM:
DATA BITS
BAUDRATE:
DATA BITS:
9600
8 CHAR LENGTH
BAUDRATE;
19200
BAUDRATE;
7
38400
BAUDRATE;
57500
BAUDRATE;
115200
BAUDRATE;
1200
BAUDRATE;
2400
BAUDRATE;
4800
Scroll forward
Scroll back
SER-COM:
PARITY
SER-COM:
STOP BITS
PARITY:
STOP BITS:
NONE
1 STOP BITS:
PARITY:
2
EVEN
PARITY:
ODD
PARITY:
Scroll forward
SPACE
Scroll back
Scroll forward
Scroll back
SER-COM:
PROTOCOL
PROTOCOL:
XON_XOFF
ENQ/ACK:
XON/XOFF+STATUS
STANDARD
Scroll forward
Scroll back
259

SETUP:
NETWORK
Network (option)
These menus will only be displayed when an optional EasyLAN interface board is installed.
NETWORK:
IP SELECTION
NETWORK:
IP ADDRESS
NETWORK:
NETMASK
NETWORK:
DEFAULT ROUTER
NETWORK:
NAMESERVER
NETWORK:
MAC ADDRESS
IP SELECTION:
DHCP+BOOTP
PARITY:
MANUAL
PARITY:
DHCP
PARITY:
BOOTP
IP ADDRESS:
192.168.1.79
NETMASK:
255.255.255.0
DEFAULT ROUTER:
192.168.1.1
NAMESERVER:
192.168.1.7
MAC ADDRESS:
00104017b80e
Read-only
260

SETUP:
RFID
RFID
These menus will only be displayed when an RFID module is installed.
RFID:
MODE
RFID:
TAGREAD
RFID:
TAGADJUST
RFID:
RETRIES
RFID:
VOIDTEXT
RFID:
FIELDSTRENGTH
MODE:
ENABLE
MODE:
DISABLE
Press <ENTER> to
execute TAGREAD
TAGADJUST:
[0]:
RETRIES:
[1]:
VOIDTEXT:
[VOID]:
Read-Only
FIELDSTRENGTH:
[100]:
261

Continued from
the previous page
Test/Service
SETUP:
TEST/SERVICE
Continued on
the next page
TEST/SERVICE:
TESTPRINT
TESTPRINT:
CONFIG
TESTPRINT:
FORMAT
TESTPRINT:
PAGE
TESTPRINT:
UDC
TESTPRINT:
FONT
CONFIG:
SW
CONFIG:
HW
CONFIG:
NETWORK
FORMAT:
ALL
PAGE:
ALL
UDC:
ALL
FONT:
ALL
ALL:
PRINT FORMATS
ALL:
PRINT PAGES
ALL:
PRINT UDC
ALL:
PRINT UDFs
TEST/SERVICE:
DATA DUMP
TEST/SERVICE:
MEMORY RESET
TEST/SERVICE:
LSS TEST
DATA DUMP:
NO
CONFIG:
YES
Scroll forward
Scroll back
MEMORY RESET:
ALL
CONFIG:
CONFIGURATION
Scroll forward
Scroll back
LSS TEST
LSS AUTO
Scroll forward
Scroll back
262

Continued from
the previous page
Media
SETUP:
MEDIA
Continued on
the next page
MEDIA :
MEDIA TYPE
MEDIA :
PAPER TYPE
MEDIA :
TESTFEED MODE
MEDIA :
LBL LENGTH DOTS
MEDIA :
SENSITIVITY
MEDIA TYPE:
GAP
CONFIG:
MARK
CONFIG:
CONTINUOUS
Scroll forward
Scroll back
PAPER TYPE:
DT
CONFIG:
TTR
Scroll forward
Scroll back
TESTFEED MODE:
FAST
MEDIA :
SLOW
LBL LENGTH DOTS:

1200
100/200/400/800/
1200/1600/2000/
2500/3000/3600/
4200/4800
SENSITIVITY:
420
130/140/160/180/
366/420/440/450/
470/480/513/527/
567/627/677/687/
864
Scroll forward
Scroll back
Scroll forward
Scroll back
MEDIA :
DARKNESS
MEDIA :
LBL REST POINT
MEDIA :
FORM ADJ DOTS X
MEDIA :
FORM ADJ DOTS Y
DARKNESS:
0
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/
9/10/-10/-9/-8/-7/
-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1
LBL REST POINT:

0
0/2/4/6/8/10/15/
20/25/30/-30/-25/
-20/-15/-10/-8/-6/
-4/-2
Scroll forward
Scroll back
FORM ADJ DOTS X:

0
0/2/4/6/8/10/15/
20/25/30/-30/-25/
-20/-15/-10/-8/-6/
-4/-2
Scroll forward
Scroll back
FORM ADJ DOTS Y:

0
0/2/4/6/8/10/15/
20/25/30/-30/-25/
-20/-15/-10/-8/-6/
-4/-2
Scroll forward
Scroll back
Scroll forward
Scroll back
263

Continued from
the previous page
264
Configuration
Return to
the start of
the loop
SETUP:
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION:
EMULATION
CONFIGURATION:
PRINT SPEED
CONFIGURATION:
CUTTER
CONFIGURATION:
LTS CALIBRATION
EMULATION:
NONE
CONFIG:
86XX-10MIL
CONFIG:
86XX-15MIL
Scroll forward
Scroll back
PRINT SPEED:
4PRINT
IN/SEC
SPPED:
5PRINT
IN/SEC
SPPED:
6PRINT
IN/SEC
SPPED:
7PRINT
IN/SEC
SPPED:
8 IN/SEC
CUTTER:
NOT
INSTALLED
CONFIG:
ENABLE
CONFIG:
DISABLE
Scroll forward
Scroll back
LTS CALIBRATION:
PRESS <ENTER>
Labels are fed out
REMOVE LABEL AND
PRESS ENTER
<Enter>
SENSITIVITY 9
OUT OF 8-14
Read only,
press<Enter>
Scroll forward
Scroll back
Upgrading Firmware
This appendix describes various methods for upgrading the printers

firmware and for switching from Intermec Fingerprint to IPL or vice versa.
265
Appendix BFirmware Upgrading
Introduction
All EasyCoder PF2/4i-series printers can use both Fingerprint v8.xx and
IPL v2.xx firmware. There are many ways to upgrade or exchange printers
firmware. Use the most convenient way. You can either do it from host by
sending the file to the printer or by inserting a CompactFlash card in the
memory card slot at the printers rear plate. There are 3 different file types
containing the firmware. The file types are related to the way of upgrade
procedure. The files can be obtained from Intermec.
File Description
File name
Type of file
1-972020-xx.bin (for FP)

1-972105-xx.bin (for IPL)
These .bin files contain the firmware kernel file only. To

be sent on serial port to printer using a communication
program, for example HyperTerminal or Printset, or via
FTP. Can also be stored on a CompactFlash card.
1-972021-xx.bin (for FP)

1-972106-xx.bin (for IPL)
These .bin files contain the firmware kernel file and the
factory default setup parameter values. To be stored on a
CompactFlash card.
Note: These files remove all files except the firmware
files, so it is advised to make a backup before running
such a file. They are primarily intended to allow
restoring forgotten passwords.
Another format is .uff files, which are created by, for instance, NetPrintSet.
They contain the kernel and optional instructions (if necessary), images,
fonts, etc. To be stored in CompactFlash memory cards.
General Principles
During upgrading, do not switch off the printer. Wait and follow the
prompts in the printers display.
If changing firmware from IPL to Fingerprint, we recommend to erase
memory to factory setup setting [FORMAT "/c",A] after the upgrade
procedure is completed.
Some update of Fingerprint may show the error mcs: Error during
setup at host terminal. This just means that there was an instruction
that erased "/c" [FORMAT "/c",A]. This is a normal condition! The
error shows that no setup file [.setup.saved] is detected on "/c". The
"/rom" setup file is copied automatically into "/c" which gives printer a
factory setup setting.
If an EasyLAN interface board is installed, by default only admin is
allowed to upgrade. See EasyLAN User's Guide for more information.
266
Upgrading From a Memory Card

This chapter describes how to upgrade the printer from a CompactFlash
card.
To upgrade the printers firmware with a CompactFlash card
1 Insert the card and switch on the printer. The printers display will
automatically show ongoing steps. The procedure ends with a normal
startup of the printer.
2 Switch off the printer and remove the card. Printer is ready for use.
CompactFlash cards with firmware (Fingerprint or IPL) can be ordered
from Intermec. Empty CompactFlash cards can be ordered from Intermec
or procured locally.
If there are more than one firmware files on the memory card, it is not
forseeable which one will be selected. However, by renaming the desired
file to FIRMWARE.BIN, you can make sure that the file will be selected.
How to make an upgrading card

There are two possible places to program a CompactFlash card. One is
your PC CompactFlash card slot, another is the printers card slot.
At the PC-side
1 Use a computer fitted with a PCMCIA slot and a CompactFlash adapter

and insert the CompactFlash card.
2 Copy the upgrade .bin or .uff file to the CompactFlash card.
At the printer side (Fingerprint only)
1 Insert the CompactFlash card in the slot at the printers rear plate.
2 Start up the printer and select Intermec Shell.
3 Press <Enter> to go to the Sel. Application menu.
4 Press <> repeatedly to browse to SOFTWARE UPDATE.
5 Press <Enter> to go to UPDATE: COMPACT FLASH?
6 Press <Enter>.
7 Start sending the file using a communication program, for example
HyperTerminal. The communication program must use zmodem.
(There is a one-minute time-out on the printer side.) Shell will
automatically rename the file to FIRMWARE.BIN to make sure that
this file will upgrade the printer.
267
8 Switch off the printer and remove the card.

Note: A special case is if the CompactFlash card already has a Fingerprint
firmware. Inserting such card will always install firmware in the printer
according to CompactFlash card. However, perhaps you like to install a
later firmware version picked from the web. If so, proceed like this:
1 Insert the CompactFlash card with a upgrade firmware on. Switch on
and wait for a completed upgrade and the normal startup of the printer
so you are in Fingerprint mode.
2 Activate the Shell program from "/rom" like this:
LOAD "/rom/SHELLXP.PRG"
MERGE "/rom/ERRHAND.PRG"
RUN
3 In Shell, select the option UPDATE: COMPACT FLASH? and press

<Enter>.
4 Send the .bin or .uff file from the host using zmodem.
268
Upgrading From the Host

Software Suggestions
1. Intermec PrintSet (IPL and Fingerprint)
Install Intermec Printset software and a serial cable. Intermec PrintSet is

included in the printer companion CD. It can also be obtained from the
Intermec Printer Support Web.
2. Terminal program (Fingerprint only)
Use Terminal program included in Windows (95/98/Me or NT/2000/XP)

and a serial cable. At serial communication, the software has to be prepared
by a protocol Zmodem and have same communication settings on both
side. We recommend hardware handshaking (RTS/CTS).
3. Command prompt with FTP
Use command prompt in Windows Windows (95/98/Me or NT/2000/

XP) and an Ethernet network.
4. Intermec NetPrintSet (Fingerprint only)
Use Intermec NetPrintSet software and a serial cable. Intermec NetPrintSet

can be obtained from the Intermec Printer Support Web.
Cable Suggestions
RS-232 Serial Cable
DB-9pin female -> DB-9pin male (see Spare Parts Catalog)
Ethernet Cable
Intermec does not provide any Ethernet cable.The cables are normally
provideed locally. At a straight connection between a host and printer, a
cross RJ45 cable is needed.
Parallel Cable
(see Spare Parts Catalog)
How to use Intermec PrintSet and serial cable.

1 Connect a serial cable between host and printer
2 Start up the printer and select Fingerprint via Shell and to listen on
serial port "uart1:" on for example baud rate 115,200.
3 Start PrintSet. The program will automatically set the communication
parameters and is ready for use.
4 Select DataXfer\Change firmware. Depending on settings, PrintSet
may ask for the admins password.
5 Send one of the following files:
1-972020-xx.bin (Fingerprint)
1-972105-xx.bin (IPL)
6 After file is received in printer, it will automatically replace the firmware
and boot up with the new one.
7 The printers display will automatically show ongoing steps. The
procedure ends with a normal startup of the printer.
269
How to use MS HyperTerminal and a serial cable

1 Connect a serial cable between host and printer.
2 Start the HyperTerminal or a similar terminal program. Select port
com1. Use a high communication speed (115,200 baud).
3 (Fingerprint only) Start up the printer and select Fingerprint via
Intermec Shell1 to listen on serial port "uart1:".
4 Make sure that your are in contact with printer by typing for example
FONTS and the printer will respond showing fonts.
5 Type a download command2 so printer is ready for receiving data:
RUN "dlk"
6 Select .bin upgrade file. Now printer waits for about 1 minute to get the
file sent using zmodem as protocol.
7 Go to Send file and send it.
and the printer will boot up with the new one.
/. In Intermec Shell it is also possible to select printer to be in the receiving mode. Start
up Intermec Shell and use <> to browse to Software Update\Update:Firmware. (You
have one minute to send the file.) Also check the printers baud rate in the Setup Mode.
Continue with items 6-8. If the printer is fitted with an EasyLAN board, user must be
allowed to upgrade.
2
/. dlk only works if the current user is allowed to update. RUN "su admin" could be
required.
1
270
How to use command prompt FTP and Ethernet

1 Connect a printer on Ethernet LAN or by a cross cable between host
and printer
2 Open an FTP session to the printer typing this command from your
Windows command prompt: FTP <ip address of the printer>
3 You will get a prompt asking you for User: type admin or user. You
may get a prompt for a Password: type pass (default; case sensitive).
Note: The user you log in as must be allowed to upgrade.
4 After some answers on your screen you will see the prompt FTP>. At
this point type bin + <Enter>, then type hash + <Enter>.
5 Now send the firmware to the printer with the command:
put <filename.bin> FLASH
6 Some ###### will appear on your screen showing the ongoing transfer.
8 Close FTP session typing bye + <Enter>.
9 After file is received in printer it will automatically replace the firmware

and the printer will boot up with the new one. The printers display will
automatically show ongoing steps and the procedure ends with a normal
startup of the printer.
How to use Intermec NetPrintSet and serial cable (Fingerprint only)

What is NetPrintSet
NetPrintSet is a printer configuration utility for Intermec printers that

allows you to upgrade or configure the printer. NetPrintSet is available
both as Netscape plugin and standalone executable.
The Netprintset can merge printers necessary file to one file either using
a CompactFlash card or download direct to printer. Necessary files are
for example Images, Fonts, Firmware, or other custom-made files.
How to use? Please refer to the Help included in the software.
If upgrading directly via NetPrintSet and printer
1 Start up the printer and select Shell. Press <Enter> to go to the SEL.
APPLICATION menu. Use <> to browse to SOFTWARE
UPDATE. Press <Enter> to go to the UPDATE: COMPACT
FLASH? menu. Use <> to go to UPDATE: FIRMWARE?. Finally,
press <Enter>.
User might not be allowed to update.
2 Start to send the file from the software. (There is a one-minute timeout
before the printer exits the receive mode.)
and the printer will boot up with the new one.
271
272
Worldwide Headquarters
6001 36th Avenue West
Everett, Washington 98203
U.S.A.
tel 425.348.2600
fax 425.355.9551
www.intermec.com
2007 Intermec Technologies
Corporation. All rights reserved.
*939-008-001*
P/N 939-008-001

Service Manual: Easycoder® Pf2I, Pf4I, and Pf4I Compact Industrial Printers

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Service Manual: Easycoder® Pf2I, Pf4I, and Pf4I Compact Industrial Printers

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Service Manual

Intermec Technologies Corporation

Document Change Record

Revised to support IM4 RFID kit. Added sections about

Models and Options

Front and Keyboard

Covers and Doors

3.1 Right-Hand Doors 42

EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial.................................................................. 46

6 Transfer Ribbon Mechanism

8 Liner Takeup Unit

8.1 Description............ 108

9 Label Taken Sensor

9.1 Description............ 114

11.1 Introduction 128

13.1 Description 142

14.1 Introduction 164

Installation Kit................................................................................................ 195

15.1 Replacing Components in Intermec RFID Kits.........................................................208

Intermec Shell v8.0 Overview............................................................................................250

Upgrading From a Memory Card . ....................................................................................267

Before You Begin

Do Not Repair or Adjust Alone

Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any

Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.

Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing.

Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible

Nicht alleine Reparaturen oder Einstellungen durchfhren

Reparieren oder justieren Sie niemals alleine stromfhrende Gerte. Aus

Nach einer Verletzung unverzglich erste Hilfe oder medizinische

Wiederbelebungsversuche mssen unverzglich eingeleitet werden, falls

Niemals an stromfhrenden Gerten arbeiten, es sei denn Sie wurden von

Global Services and Support

Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current

These services are available from Intermec:

1 and then choose 2.

Order Intermec Media

Order printer labels and

1 and then choose 1

Order spare parts

Order spare parts.

1 or 2 and then choose 4

Talk to technical support about

2 and then choose 2

Get a return authorization

2 and then choose 1

Ask about an existing

1 or 2 and then choose 3

Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec

Who Should Read This Document?

EasyCoder PF2i Users Guide (Fingerprint version)

EasyCoder PF4i Users Guide (Fingerprint version)

EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Users Guide

EasyCoder PF2i Users Guide (IPL version)

EasyCoder PF4i Users Guide (IPL version)

EasyCoder PF4i Compact Industrial Users Guide (IPL

EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, and PF4i Compact Industrial

Fingerprint Programmers Reference Manual

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Models and Options

Chapter 1Models and Options

Keyboard shows printer model